教案设计

教案设计收藏。

我来与大家分享一篇有关“教案设计”的网络文章，希望大家能在这里放松心情，享受阅读。制作教案课件是老师工作的重要部分，因此我们的老师需要认真写作。教案对于推动教学研究和教学改革起着重要的作用。

教案设计(篇1)

教案设计是教学活动中非常重要的一环，它直接影响到教师的教学效果和学生的学习成果。一个好的教案设计能够帮助教师明确教学目标，合理安排教学过程，提供有效的教学资源，为学生提供良好的学习体验。下面将详细介绍关于教案设计的内容和步骤。

一、教案设计的内容

1. 教学目标：教学目标是教师对于学生学习结果的预期，通常包括知识目标、能力目标和情感目标。知识目标是指学生在学习过程中所需掌握的知识内容；能力目标是指学生在学习过程中所需掌握的操作技能和解决问题的能力；情感目标是指培养学生正确的价值观和良好的品德素养。

2. 教学内容：教学内容是指教师在一节课或一次教学活动中需要教给学生的具体知识和技能。教学内容应根据教学目标来确定，并且应结合学生的实际情况进行选择和整合。

3. 教学过程：教学过程是指教师在教学活动中采取的具体教学方式和方法。教学过程应根据教学目标和教学内容来确定，并且应灵活、多样化和富有趣味性。

4. 教学资源：教学资源是指教师在教学活动中使用的各种工具和材料，例如教材、教具、多媒体设备、课件等。教学资源应根据教学目标和教学内容来选择和准备，并且应符合教学需要和学生的学习特点。

二、教案设计的步骤

1. 分析教学目标：教师首先要明确教学目标，包括知识目标、能力目标和情感目标。然后，根据学生的实际情况和学习需求，确定教学目标的重点和难点。

2. 设计教学内容：教师在设计教学内容时，应结合教材和教学大纲，选择和整合合适的知识和技能，并且要保证教学内容的连贯性和系统性。

3. 设计教学过程：教师在设计教学过程时，应根据教学目标和教学内容来选择合适的教学方法和教学活动，例如讲解、讨论、实验、活动等。同时，应注意教学过程的层次性和顺序性，以及学生的参与度和学习兴趣。

4. 准备教学资源：教师在准备教学资源时，应根据教学目标和教学内容来选择合适的教材、教具、多媒体设备、课件等。同时，要确保教学资源的质量和有效性，以及教室的布置和环境的整洁。

5. 评估教学效果：教师在进行教学活动之后，应及时对教学效果进行评估和反思。评估可以采用各种形式和方法，例如作业、问卷、测验、讨论等。评估的目的是为了了解学生的学习情况和教学过程中存在的问题，以便进行调整和改进。

三、教案设计的要求

1. 明确性：教案设计应表达清晰明确的教学目标和教学过程，确保学生可以明确知道教师期望他们达到的目标和要求。

2. 适应性：教案设计应根据学生的实际情况和学习需求来确定教学内容和教学过程，以便满足学生的学习特点和发展需要。

3. 针对性：教案设计应根据教材和教学大纲来确定教学内容和教学过程，以便保证教学的连贯性和系统性。

4. 灵活性：教案设计应灵活多样，富有创造性和趣味性，以便激发学生学习的兴趣和主动性。

教案设计是一项需要重视和精心准备的工作。一个好的教案设计可以帮助教师实现教学目标，提高教学效果，激发学生的学习兴趣和主动性。因此，教师应不断提高自己的教学设计能力，不断改进和完善教案设计，以便为学生成长发展提供更好的教学环境和学习机会。

教案设计(篇2)

主要内容：

理解、分析文中对蚂蚁的生动描写；感受文章对生存、生命的深刻思考；理解感悟式的写法。

教学步骤：

一、学生朗读全文，积累词语。

畏畏缩缩 左顾右盼 义无反顾 怜悯 主宰 蹒跚 戳破

（建议：要有侧重点地掌握词语的音、形、义）

二、整体把握文章（划分层次，明确主要内容）。

本文层次十分清晰，可分为两部分，如何划分？

明确：1－5为第一层次 6－9为第二层次

请概括层意。 －免费资源站：

明确：第一层（对一只发现饼干屑蚂蚁的生动描写）；

第二层（由蚂蚁而引发的个人感悟）。

三、分析文章，理解感悟式写法。

1．第一层次理解与分析

5四个自然段，想想这是只怎样的蚂蚁？

明确：胆小而又自足的蚂蚁。

请同学们标画出表现蚂蚁“胆小”和“自足”的相关语句，再读读。想想作者为什么能把蚂蚁写得如此传神呢？

明确：因为作者采用拟人化手法，生动刻画了蚂蚁的动作、神态、心理。

请选择你认为最传神生动的词句，说说你的感受（词句品味）。

（可结合课后“词句品味与积累”，交流展示）。

（结合练习题一）：文中运用了一系列拟人化的词语来写蚂蚁是为了赞扬蚂蚁吗？目的是什么？

明确：不是为了赞扬蚂蚁。在文中作者只是一个冷静的旁观者。目的是为了传神生动地描写蚂蚁，同时有一定的幽默感（如：义无反顾、重大判断等）

一层总结：像作者一样，采用拟人化的手法，赋予动物以人的情态、心理，你笔下的动物就可能写得生动形象、活灵活现。但这必须建立在细心观察的基础上。

板书：细心观察——对象人格化（赋予动物以人的情态、心理）

2．第二层次理解与分析 －免费资源站：

第二层是写作者的内心感悟。请同学们细读6－9自然段，分析作者是如何感悟的，感悟的.切入点是什么？

明确：（蚂蚁）凭借运气获得了饼干屑，就快乐得要晕过去，不知道上方就有一副怜悯的眼光在居高临下地观察它，更不知道某一根手指顷刻之间就能将它捻成碎末——（联想）——（我）另一高度上面同样有一副眼光正在注视着“我”，主宰“我”的命运。

由上述可知，虽然蚂蚁在人类的眼中是个十分渺小的事物，然而我发现此时我们与蚂蚁却有着惊人的相似，这说明了什么道理？

明确：往往自足于眼前的幸福，无法主宰自己的命运。从整个生物界来说，我们与蚂蚁一样只是生物链中的一个因素，我们何尝不也是一只渺小的蚂蚁！

板书：

人类也是一只蚂蚁

↑

蚂蚁 ———— 感悟 ———— 人类 （感悟式写法）

↑

自足于眼前的幸福

无法主宰自己的命运

文章末尾说“蚂蚁是令人感慨的动物”而不是说是令人感动的动物，为什么？

明确：从全文上看作者对蚂蚁毫无感动之情，而是一种怜悯和同情，不忍心伸手戳破它的快乐，而由蚂蚁联想到人类自己。请同学们想想，作者内心有怎样的感慨？

明确：对生命的悲悯、同情，对自足于眼前幸福的反思，对无法主宰自我生命的无奈，对生命意义的冷静思考等等。

四、作业：

根据平时的观察，选择你熟悉的一种动物，写一则生动的片段（。

要点：细心观察，对象人格化（赋予动物以人的情态、心理）。

教案设计(篇3)

教材分析：

黄蓓佳的小说《心声》，是反映中小学基础教育问题的一篇小说。这部小说，写了一位与万卡有着相同命运的小男孩，要求在语文公开课上朗读课文《万卡》却遭拒绝的故事。揭示了社会生活和义务教育中存在着令人深思的问题。这部小说通过对李京京这个人物形象的刻画，呼唤教师对学生的尊重和爱护，呼唤珍视学生的美好情感和独特体验。

教学目标：

【知识与技能】

1、理解“心声”的深刻意义，学习主人公对美好生活的执著追求。

2、体会和学习小说的艺术特色。学习作者运用心理和动作描写刻画人物性格的方法。

【过程与方法】

1、理清课文的思路并能复述故事情节。

2、通过对矛冲突的分析，挖掘人物的内心世界，深刻理解文章的主题。

【情感、态度与价值观】

引导学生学习主人公对美好生活的执着的追求，懂得在今后生活中怎样去珍惜亲情、友情，促进健康师生关系的形成。

教学重点难点

教学重点：

1、分析刻画人物形象的写法，重点分析心理描写，把握人物丰富的内心世界。

2、了解映衬手法，探究小说双线交织的艺术特色。

教学难点：

理解标题“心声”的深刻含义。

教学理念：

1、提倡主动探究、团结合作、勇于创新的精神；提倡教师、学生和文本的平等对话。

2、提倡编者意图、写作意图和学习意图的和谐融通，促进学生语文素养的提高。

教法与学法导航：

教法：引导法。

学法：自主合作、交流、探究。

课前准备：

学生准备：借助工具书扫除字词障碍，阅读课文。

教师准备：收集有关资料，以便引导学生多角度解读课文；制作课件。

课时安排：

一课时

教与学互动设计

一、创设情境、激情导入：

在大人的眼里，我们是生活在温室里的花朵，每天沐浴着父母给予我们的阳光，无忧无虑的生活。可是，随着岁月的流失，我们一天天的长大了，面对人生中的许多挫折和困惑，我们有自己的心声，同时也渴望父母 和老师能够听听我们的心声。今天让我们一起走进《心声》这篇课文去听听主人翁李京的心声是什么？

二、检查预习，快问快答。

（1）小说的三要素是什么？

（2）正音

呵斥(hē chì)、窸窣(xīsū)、纸捻子(niǎn)、

发窘(jiǒng) 抽噎(yē)

妒忌(dùjì)、 沙哑(yǎ) 、 桢(zhēn)

发颤(chàn) 簪子（zān）

毛毛剌剌（là）、恍惚（huǎng hū）

撇嘴（piě）契诃夫（qì hē）过瘾（yǐn）

（3）释义：

呵斥：大声斥责。

窸窸窣窣：象声词，形容细小的摩擦声音。

琅琅：象声词，金石相击的声音、响亮的读书声音等。

沙哑：(嗓子)发音困难，声音低沉而不圆润。

斩钉截铁：形容说话办事坚决果断，毫不犹豫。

毛毛剌剌：指表面粗糙，不光滑。

从容不迫：非常镇静，不慌不忙的样子。

出风头：表现自己，自鸣得意地显示自己比别人行。

（4）作者简介：

三、自读感知、整体把握

1、学生快速阅读课文，提取故事主要情节进行复述。

示例：在一次语文公开课的准备过程中程老师设计了让学生表情朗读小说《万卡》的教学环节。学生李京京被《万卡》深深吸引而无比喜欢，很想参与课文的表情朗读。他的这一愿望遭到老师的断然拒绝和同学的无端嘲笑最后，在公开课上，当程老师的按部就班被学生的怯场打乱时，李京京举起了手，用沙哑的嗓子满怀感情地朗读了课文，表达了主人公万卡和自己的心声。

2、梳理故事情节：分别用一句话概括小说的四个情节。 朗读遭到拒绝——伤心回忆往事——纠正同学错误——主动要求朗读（梳理小说故事情节时，引导学生根据小说的开端、发展、高潮、结局，用精炼的语言概括，板书）

四、合作交流 解读探究

1、教师引导学生调动自己的生活经历和切身体验进行个性化解读，并设计话题让学生讨论。

（1）小组讨论：小说着重刻画了哪些个人物形象?文中的李京京有着怎样的生活经历?你喜欢这个人物形象吗?结合小说内容谈你的看法和理由。

把握的基本点：李京是一个朴实真诚、善良而宽容、自信而勇敢、对生活有着美好愿望、执著追求真善美的少年。

（2）小组讨论：李京京的心声是什么?

学生讨论：李京京的“心声”不仅仅渴望能在语文公开课上读课文，其深层的“心声”包括两个方面：（一）渴望老师能平等的对待每一个学生，给予每一个学生相同的关心和发展的机会。（二）渴望父母和谐、家庭温暖和谐，能生活在一个幸福安宁的环境里。

2、小说为什么将万卡的身世与李京京的活动交织在一起？《万卡》在这篇小说中起什么作用？你从中得到有关小说阅读和欣赏方面的哪些启示?

现实和《万卡》在李京京的心里已经是真实与虚拟交融了，李京京悲凉的情感世界也就会呈现在读者的面前，能更好的打动读者，让读者产生共鸣。《万卡》在文中起情节发展的线索作用。文章就是以朗读《万卡》为契机，带入情节和人物的。万卡和主人翁李京京的活动以及他的心声仅仅缠绕在一起，借着万卡，小说全面地展现李京京悲凉的感情世界

启示一：要融进小说中去，与主人公同呼吸，共命运，才能深入理解作品。

启示二：要从小说中出来，从生活中发现小说，从小说中理解生活。

3、你是如何看待程老师？

学生展开讨论。老师引导学生把握的要点：好强、自信、对工作认真负责、但是也存在不足，公开课事先安排，弄虚作假，在教学上缺乏对学生的尊重和认可，但能及时的纠正自己的错误。

4、由这篇小说你还想到那些问题？

学生自由发言

（1）什么才是真正的好的公开课？

（2）公开课是不是表演课？诚信怎样体现？

（3）不和睦家庭孩子的教育问题如何解决？学生的心理问题如何去辅导？

五、总结反思

小说讲述了一个与《万卡》有着相似命运的小男孩，要求在公开课上朗读课文《万卡》遭到老师拒绝，通过这个故事揭示了义务教育中普遍存在的一些令人深思的问题。小说的思想内涵深沉，人物形象凄楚，情节叙述纤丽。语言表达伤感。

六、布置作业：（2选1）

（1）请以“老师请听我说”为题写一篇不少于600字的作文。

（2）替李京京给爷爷写一封像万卡那样的长信，以诉说自己对幸福快乐生活的希冀。

教案设计(篇4)

活动目标：

1、了解食品的保质期及它的作用，知道应该在保质期内实用食品，激发幼儿的食品卫生意识；

15讲一讲活动过程：

其实，我是吃坏了东西了，哎，昨天的时候，老师和好朋友出去玩，买了一些牛奶喝了，谁知道牛奶是过期的，所以，老师的肚子现在还疼呢。吃了过期的东西会不舒服的，会生病的。 老师是怎么知道吃过的牛奶是过期的呢？（盒子上有时间的）盒子上的时间叫食品保质期2、观察感知哪些食品有保质期啊？看看我们的教室里面哪些东西有保质期啊？你在哪里找到保质期？

师生小结：一般来说，饮料的保质期都在哪里？（瓶口上） 盒子包装的保质期在哪里啊？（盒子底部） 口袋食品的保质期在哪里啊？（口袋边上） 原来他们的位置都不一样的啊师：那保质期的时间是不是都是一样的呢？回家的时候你们看看再告诉我。

15消费者权益保护日，如果你买的东西质量不好或者是过期食品都可以为自己讨回公道的。

教案设计(篇5)

年级：初二科目：语文姓名：

窗泰格特

一、教学重点：

1、人性的美与丑

2、精巧的构思；对比的描写。

含蓄的语言

二、预习

消遣（qiǎn）俯瞰（kàn）一泓（hóng）咳嗽（sòu）五彩斑斓（lán）

栩栩如生（xǔ）充塞（sè）挪动（nuó）竭力（jí）胳膊肘（zhǒu）

气喘吁吁（xū）争奇斗妍津津有味扣人心弦不得而知纹丝不动大惊小怪

新课教授

一、导入新课：

房间因为有了窗口才透进阳光，心灵因为有了窗口才看到希望。我们的生活中有许多有形、无形的窗口。也许窗外有七色阳光，窗内还有动人的故事。让我们来学习泰格特的小说《窗》。

二、整体把握课文并深入分析文章。

1、在预习的基础上，速读全文，请用简洁的语言概括故事情节

小小说《窗》通过对同病房的两个重病人相互之间所持态度的描写，表现了美与丑两种不同的心灵，体现了极其深刻的扬善贬恶的道德力量。

开端：关系融洽

发展：从“享受”到“困扰”

高潮：见死不救

结局：光秃秃的一堵墙

3、这两个人物形象你最想评论的是哪一个人物形象？你对他的评价是什么？并说说理由。

靠窗的病人。

他是一个心胸宽广的人。因为他自己的病也很重，但是他每天坚持讲不存在的美景来鼓励不靠窗的病人，减轻他的痛苦。

他是一个乐观的人。热爱生命、热爱生活的人（他看到的其实什么也没有，就是一堵光秃秃的墙，可他把公园景物描述得丰富、生动而美丽）

他是一个意志坚强的人。他两个病都很重，每天都很痛苦、很寂寞，他在这样的情况下能这样做，可见他意志坚强

他是一个关心他人、善良的人。一个心灵美好，品德高尚的人。（自己重病但还是精心编造美丽的景色，就是为了想解除同伴的痛苦，给他战胜病魔的精神力量。）

不靠窗的病人。

他是一个自私的人。靠窗的病人与他一样病重。但是靠窗的病人却想办法鼓励他，带给他快乐。而不靠窗的病人却始终考虑自己。为了实现自己的目的而不管病友的死活。

他是个心胸狭隘、自私的、冷酷无情的人。靠窗的病人半夜犯病，他大声咳嗽，液体充塞了他的肺腔，他只要帮忙按一下电铃，护士就会赶来，可是他纹丝不动，见死不救。他见死不救就是为了尽快得到那张床，这是牺牲他人来成全自己。

他是一个妒忌心很强的人。（三个为什么？）

小结：一个人热爱生活、热爱生命没错，退一步说，有点自私心、也是可以理解。但是，我们不能为了个人利益而不顾他人利益，不恩你牺牲他人利益甚至是他人生命为代价来达到个人的目的。

4、通过窗，我们看到了人性中美的一面，人性中丑的一面。那么，本文运用什么手法来塑造人物的呢？有何作用？

对比（课文中两个人物的对比非常鲜明，在对比中人物心灵的美与丑、善与恶表现得十分突出）

5、从人物和情节两个角度看，小说以“窗”为标题，有什么作用？

从情节看，小说的情节紧紧围绕“窗”展开的，是线索。

从人物看，“窗”有喻人的心灵的窗口的意思。透过这个“窗”，我们看到了两个病人的完全不同的灵魂。

6、好的作品结尾，往往不是思绪的终结，而是更加激越腾飞。“他看到的只是光秃秃的一堵墙”。读到这一句，你是不是受到心灵的震撼？说说你最强烈的感受是什么？

结尾发人深省！损人利己的人不配享受美好世界的风光。作者给他安排了一个无法窥见美、领略美的报复性的结果，从而暗示了生活的真理：凡是心胸狭隘、视野短浅的自私者，必然不能与怀襟磊落、目光高远的高尚者同样享有感受美、体现美的均等机遇。这样的结尾十分巧妙，既出人意料，又在情理之中。绝妙的讽刺。

7、小说内涵丰富，意蕴深刻，我们从中可以受到怎样的启示呢？

在生活中做一个心胸宽广、关心别人的人。

用自己美好的心灵去对待我们周围的每一个人。

热爱生活，热爱生命，爱自己，也爱他人。

在生活中做人不可太自私，不可只顾个人利益。

心有多美，世界就有多美！卑劣丑陋的灵魂不会找到亦美亦善的境界。

三、拓展延伸

创造情境：假如一个新的病人进了这间病房，这扇“窗”下又会发生什么故事呢？发挥想象，续编故事

提示：

让病人乙活下去，教育更多的人，既符合善良人的心愿，又符合小说的情节。

四、小结

小小说《窗》通过对同病房的两个重病人相互之间所持态度的描写，表现了美与丑两种不同的心灵，体现了极其深刻的扬善贬恶的道德力量。

五、教后记。

推荐课外读物：

欧.亨利《最后一片藤叶》《麦琪的礼物》

栗良平《一碗阳春面》夏洛蒂.勃朗特《简.爱》

老师寄语：

一扇小小的窗户，揭示了人性的美与丑，成为我们窥视灵魂、认识人性的了望台。让我们懂得了只有纯洁的心灵、高尚的人格才能浇灌出绚丽多彩的生命之花，才能幻化出充满生机的、美好、幸福的生活之景。如果一个人心中没有春天，那么他的眼中只能是一片荒漠。一个道德卑劣的人是不会找到亦美亦善的境界的。让我们在生活中，用至仁、至善、至美的心灵，用黑色的眼睛去寻找美丽的风景，把他送给我们身边的每一个人吧！愿我们的生活越来越美好！

教案设计(篇6)

教学目标

1、顺畅朗读，准确翻译，概括寓意。

2、了解寓言故事蕴涵的深刻寓意，从中接受教育。

教学重难点：

重点：了解课文内容，理解课文中蕴涵的深刻寓意。

难点：顺畅朗读，准确翻译。

教学过程

一、导入：世上本无事，庸人自扰之。”由这句俗语，老师想到了古时候的一则成语故事——杞人忧天（投影出示）

二、引导学生说说《列子》，了解作家作品众生共享课前搜集整理的《列子》资料（出示投影）

三、朗读课文，听读，自读，正音。

四、个别学生朗读、翻译，结合课下注释。（出示投影）重点句子；（充塞四虚，无处无块(奈何忧其坏？（投影出示翻译）

五、学生讨论这则寓言的寓意。

1．杞人“忧”什么？“忧”到什么程度？后来杞人的情绪发生了什么变化？

如何理解“日月星宿，亦积气中之有光耀者，只使坠，亦不能有所中伤”这句话？

这句话的'意思是：日月星辰，也不过是聚集在一起的有光的气体，即使坠落，也不会击中甚至打伤人。这句话揭示了杞人的无根据的瞎担心。

3、从这则故事中你了解到“杞人忧天”这个成语是什么意思？

这是庸人自扰，毫无根据地瞎担心，后比喻没有根据或不必要的忧虑。（投影出示）

六、拓展

讨论：1、如何看待《杞人忧天》中那个好心人的解释？

寓言中那位热心人对天、地、星、月的解释是不科学的，只能代表当时的认识水平，但他那种关心他人的精神、耐心诱导的做法，还是值得学习的。

2、现实环境中的你，面对今天的环境，杞人的行为对你有什么启发？

九、课堂总结：杞人忧天似的做法大可不必，但生活中大大小小的烦恼忧愁在所难免。如何更好地化解忧愁，笑对人生？相信大家通过这节课的学习会有所感悟和启迪。

教案设计(篇7)

1、设置情境：

我们假想这儿就是小说中的病房，穿越时空的隧道，我们要在这儿举办一次《讲述》节目，请两位病人讲述他们自己的故事。

活动按以下四步进行：角色分工、精读文本、小组交流、汇报展示。

下面我们五人一组，先进行分工，两位病人，这两位是这次讲述节目的主角，你们俩共同讲述发生在病房里的故事，你们是怎么做的，特别重要的是你当时是怎么想的，为什么要那么做。要力求把病人的内心世界展露出来。让听众听完故事后能真正认识这两位病人。

两位观众，你们可以根据自己对小说的理解帮助两位病人尽可能把故事讲深讲透，在汇报表演的时候，也可以向两位病人提问，问病人疏漏了而观众很想了解的问题，教案《《窗》教案》。

一位主持人，这位该是节目的灵魂人物，要做好组织协调工作，开头介绍节目现场，中间做好有效的引导与协调，还要控制好讲述时间，时间不超过5分钟。

2、下面五位同学先很快分工(2)

3、有了自己的角色定位后，请大家根据自己的角色需要精读小说，仔细去揣摩人物的内心世界，为等会儿的讲述服务。(3)

4、下面是小组交流，五人一组开始现场准备讲述节目，准备中先由两位病人讲述故事，其他三位同学帮助他们进行补充与完善，要努力使他们的讲述符合文本内容，符合人物心理。(4)

修正和补充。下面汇报开始。(6)

教案设计(篇8)

1、我们看到这是一个感人至深的故事，更是一个发人深省的故事。关于这两位病人，大家一定有很多话要说，下面我们一起来评述一下这两位病人。

小结：第一个病人他渴望生命，对生活有着满腔的热望，所以他幻想出了这五彩斑斓生动活泼的景象，激励自己跟病魔作顽强的斗争，他是坚强的乐观的。同时，在他心目中，病友的生命同样重要，他要尽自己所能激发病友的生之欲望，点燃同伴奄奄一息的生命之火，所以他更是善良的无私的高尚的。

第二位病人他也热爱生命，他也有善良的本性，但私欲的膨胀使他变得冷酷无情。人性被这嫉妒的毒液给淹没了，灵魂被自私的心理扭曲了。

2、同样的窗口，为什么昔日的病友能看到美丽的风景，而他看到的只是光秃秃的一堵墙?

而靠窗的那位病人无私高尚博爱，他的心灵之窗是打开的，他的心中有最美的风景。冷漠的心中不会有春天，所以也看不到春天。他的心灵之窗是紧紧地关闭着的，他的心中横着一堵墙，所以他无法看到那美丽的图景，而只能看到那光秃秃的一堵墙。

3、"他看到的只是光秃秃的一堵墙"，小说至此就戛然而止了，这位病人以后会怎么样呢?

大家畅想一下，当他看到一堵光秃秃的墙以后，他会怎么想怎么做?

五、联系生活，感悟小说中的哲理：

这无数种的结局都有可能，然而我们还是衷心希望这位病人能找回自己善良的本性。最后，当我们离开病房的时候，让我们一起来关心这位病人。我建议每一位同学写一句话或一段话作为礼物送给他，希望他在我们同学的帮助下也能看到最美的风景，能够好好地生活下去。

大家说得非常好，非常富有哲理性，富有感染力。这些话是送给这位病人的，也是送给我们每个人自己的，我们并非圣人，我们也会迷失自己，所以我们常常需要洗涤心灵，充实心灵，美化心灵。

还记得这一片空白吗?我们心中有美，它便是幅五彩斑斓的图画。我们心中有爱，它便是天使圣洁的羽衣。我们心中有希望，它便是清晨的曙光。我们心中有热情，它便是熊熊燃烧的火焰…同学们，让我们打开心灵之窗，去沐浴窗外的阳光雨露吧！在文学的殿堂中去感受人性的光辉。

教案设计(篇9)

教学内容：

《林海》第25自然段。

教学目标 ：

1.思想认识：受到热爱祖国的思想教育。

2.基础知识：理解课文第二部分内容，了解大兴安岭的景物特点，学习新词。

3.基本能力：①学习作者在描写景物中表达思想感情的方法；②结合课文表达方法进行语言文字训练；③背诵第35自然段。

教学重点：了解大兴安岭的景物特点。

教学难点 ：学习作者表达思想感情的方法。

教学过程 ：

一、复习导入 ，明确任务

舒服。)

舒服之情的?)

二、自由初读，整体感知

1.用自己最喜欢的读书方式读第二部分。(第25自然段)

林、花)

三、精读举一，熟读反三

(1)精读举一

学习第二自然段。

读细读，在草稿纸上写出读懂了什么，还有什么不懂的问题。

画用横线画出写岭的特点的词句，用波浪线画出写景美的词句。

议小组交流读懂的内容，讨论不能解决的问题。

解搜集各组不能解决的较集中的问题，老师引导解决。

读先读画横线句子，通过范读、抽读、齐读等方式，读出大兴安岭的岭多温柔的特点；再读画波浪线的句子，通过自由读、同桌互读的方式，读出对大兴安岭的喜悦之情；最后抽个别学生读，其余学生闭目想像，体会作者的喜悦之情。

谈说说学习这段的收获。比谁说得多，说的最有价值。(老师总结指出：①借景抒情表达真情实感；②通过读体会思想感情；③写秦岭与大兴安岭的岭形成对比，突出大兴安岭岭的特点，学习比较构思的表达方式。训练：以《我的家乡》为题，说说用比较法该怎样构思?)

小结学法：读、画、议、解、谈。

(2)熟读反三

1.按第二自然段的学法学习写林的两个自然段。

提示：谈学习这两自然段收获。①借景抒情，体会感情；②比喻、反问等修辞手法；③点面结合的表达方式；训练：以《课间活动》或《野炊》为题，面可写些什么，点可写些什么?④理解课文内容后，限时间背诵课文。

2.运用前面的学法学习写花这一自然段。

提示：画，用简笔画画出经打扮了的像小姑娘一样的大兴安岭。(先读句子：兴安岭多么会打扮自己呀：青松作衫，白桦为裙，还穿着绣花鞋。再想像作画，比比谁画得又快又符合课文内容。)训练：一个句子中用上两种或三种修辞手法。

四、巩固练习，落实目标

1.有感情朗读课文第二部分，同桌互相背诵35自然段。

2.说说本课表达真情实感的方式。(写景抒情)

3.从本册教材中各找三课写景抒情和叙事抒情的文章。

《我爱老师》、《家乡的田野》、《啊，好大的黄桷树》、《环卫工人，我赞美您》。

点面结合、比喻等修辞手法。

教案设计(篇10)

教学目标 ：

1、 把握老王的性格特点。

2、 揣摩重点语句含义，体会作者遣词造句的匠心。

3、 体会作者的思想感情。

教学重点；

领会作者与人物的思想感情，揣摩重点语句含义，体会作者遣词造句的匠心。

教学内容：

本文写的是作者与车夫老王交往的故事。老王一辈子很苦，靠一辆破旧的三轮车活命，他的眼睛又不好，生活更是凄凉艰难。但是他心好，老实厚道，关心人。作者笔下的老王虽然穷苦卑微，但是精神上没有受到任何污染，是极其淳朴的好人。作者在文章里含蓄地提出了要关怀不幸者的社会问题。学习时，让学生有感情地朗读课文，了解叙述描写的表达方式，揣摩记叙文语言特点。

教学设计：

一、导入

生字词

二、整体感悟

1、文中介绍了老王哪些艰难的生活境况？记叙了与老王交往过程中的哪几件事？通过这些叙述与描写，你认为老王是一个怎样的人？

1） 介绍老王的职业；生理缺陷；居住条件。

鸡蛋表示感谢。

有良心、关心人的人。

2、你认为作者是一个怎样的人，具体体现在哪些地方？

我也是一个善良的人。具体表现在：照顾老王的生意，坐他的车；老王再客气，也付给他应得的报酬；老王送来香油、鸡蛋，不让他白送；关心老王的生活。

3、本文表达了作者一种怎样的思想感情？

对老王的不幸深表同情，为自己对老王的关爱还不够和自己无力真正改善老王的境遇而感到愧 。

4、这篇课文叙述的事情较多，作者是怎样组织的？文章的线索是什么？

以我与老王的交往为线索，兼用逻辑顺序和时间顺序来编排。开头三段写老王的基本情况，按逻辑顺序编排，一是职业，老王的谋生手段；二是生理缺陷，老王谋生的困难；三是居住条件，这是前两点的结果，收入少，生活就苦。下面的内容按时间顺序安排，回忆与老王的交往。

三、重点岩读

指名朗读有一天，我在家听到打门那是一个幸运的人对一个不幸者的愧 部分，思考下列问题。

鸡蛋？体现了老王怎样的性格特点？

知恩图报、心地善良

2、老王说我不是要钱，为什么最后还收了钱？你是怎样理解的？

老王怕我真的托人给他送钱，平白给我添麻烦。体现了老王的朴实善良。

3、对课文结尾一句话，应该怎样理解？

一个社会总有幸运者和不幸者，幸运者有责任关爱不幸者，关注他们的命运，让他们过上好日子，帮助改善他们的处境。作者回想起来，对老王的关爱还很不够，所以，感到愧

四、为什么作者一家能对老王那样的不幸者那么关心、爱护？要有怎样的精神才能做到作者那样尊重人、理解人、关心人？

主要是平等观念和人道主义精神。

人与人之间的关系应该是平等的，个人由于境遇不同，就有幸运与不幸的差别，甚至差别很大。一个幸运者只有关爱不幸者的责任。没有歧视不幸者的理由。现在，社会要求我们每个人有人道主义精神，要关心别人、尊重别人对社会作出的贡献，作者一家几是对不幸者老王怀有一颗爱心，具有人道主义精神的人。

五、课后反思

GZ85.com延伸阅读

湖的设计教案收藏13篇

资料意义广泛，可以指一些参考素材。在我们的平时工作生活中，会经常需要参考资料。参考资料可以促进我们的学习工作效率的提升。只不过，你是否知道有哪些资料种类呢？经过收集，小编为您献上湖的设计教案收藏13篇，请阅读，或许对你有所帮助！

湖的设计教案 篇1

教材分析

萧乾的《吆喝》以平易而又不乏生动幽默的语言介绍了旧北京街市上动人的一景，缓缓的追忆语调中流露出的是愉悦和怀想，让人不由自主地品味到生活中蕴涵的浓郁的情趣。内容贴近生活，文字也不艰深。学生基本上可以自读，在自读后由学生质疑提问，师生共同解决。

教学目标

知识目标

积累字词，掌握词的读音、意义。了解作者及其对吆喝的品味分析。

能力目标

培养学生搜集整理资料及赏析语言的能力。

情感态度与价值观

品味日常生活中的动人底蕴，培养学生热爱本土民俗文化的情感。

教学重、难点

1、分析把握文章结构。

2、体会语言方面的特点。

3、体验作者在写“吆喝”时的内在情感。

教学方法

1、自主学习法。

2、诵读品味法。

3、创造性学习法。

教学过程

一、情景导入视频导入

二、掌握字词

招徕(lá?)钳形(q?án)铁铉(xuàn)囿于(yòu)隔阂(hé)馄饨(hún)(tún)佐料(zu?)饽饽(bō)小钹(bó)雪花酪(lào)蘸(zhàn)马趴(pā)兜里(dōu)秫秸杆(shú)(jiē)卤煮(l?)山楂(zhā)荸荠(bí)(qí)荞麦(qiáo)嘞(lei)

三、整体感知课文内容

请同学们快速跳读全文，圈点勾画，回答下列问题。

1、什么是吆喝？吆喝是街头各种商贩的叫卖声，是当时小商贩用于招来顾客而做出的各种音响，其实吆喝是那时媒体不发达的年代里的一种口头广告，起宣传作用。也是一种如管弦乐器的艺术，耐人寻味。

2、文中的吆喝一共介绍了多少个？都涉及了人们生活的哪些方面？2 18种。吃的、玩的、用的。

3、叫卖者吆喝时有哪些本领？得气力足、嗓子脆、口齿伶俐、咬字清楚、还会现编词儿、脑子快、能随机应变。

4、作者是用什么顺序、什么办法把杂乱的吆喝声整理的井然有序？

器乐时间顺序早上（5-7）从早到晚（5-9）（引入）晚上（8-9）声乐吆喝春天，到夏天（介绍）一年四季（10）秋天，到冬天（评价）吆喝的内容吆喝的声调吆喝的音韵节奏方法指导：当我们要把一些丰富多彩的资料整理成一篇文章时，我们就要想办法用特定的顺序，可以按时间的顺序、分类的办法整理，最主要是写文章时，要用过渡句、总起句。这样我们的文章内容就会介绍的很清楚，内容也很集中，让读者一看就明白。

四、精读美文，探究美点。

1、在调查中你最喜欢那一句吆喝？

用我以为最有趣，因为句式来回答。（提示从修辞、音调、押韵等角度评析）

2、欣赏课外吆喝声。说说它们各自有什么特点？

五、体味情感

1、作者对北京的吆喝声怀有怎样的感情？(喜爱)

2、对这些渐渐失去的吆喝声又怀有什么样的情感？从哪句话、哪个词可以看出？（遗憾、惋惜）

3、文中最后一句包含着作者怎样情感？（期望）

六、创作吆喝

1、选取自己熟悉或喜爱的商品创作一则吆喝广告。（创作包括内容、喊腔、若能京腔最好，也可以用自己的方言。）

七、小结

八、课后作业

观察在街头做生意的人吆喝时的外貌、动作、神态、语言等，作一个片段描写。200—300字。

湖的设计教案 篇2

教学目标：

1、集中识记“滑、玻、璃、碎、攒、封、歉、箱、顿”，书写“骄傲、玻璃、继续”6个生字，根据词典，会给“骄傲”选择正确的意思，联系课文理解“往常”、“不自在”2个词语。

2、在正确流利地读课文的基础上，通过填空的方式说课文写了一件什么事。

3、感知小男孩的心理变化过程，有感情地朗读小男孩开心、害怕、不自在的三个句子。

教学重难点：

感知小男孩的心理变化过程，有感情地朗读小男孩开心、害怕、不自在的三个句子。

教学准备：

多媒体课件

教学过程：

一、导入

1、今天，我们学习一篇新课文。谁来读读课题？指名读，齐读。

2、读了课题，你像知道什么？

（我指的谁？你指的是谁？为什么为他骄傲？）

3、这些问题的答案就藏在课文中，让我们赶紧去课文中找一找把。

二、初读课文，了解大意，学习生字。

1、自由读课文，要把课文读通顺，遇到不认识的字可以拼读小鱼身上的字，也可以轻轻地问问同桌，还可以举手问老师。最后想一想刚才的这3个问号。

2、小朋友们，你们读得真认真呀！课文中的生字宝宝都迫不及待地想跟你们这些爱学习的小朋友见面了。我们请他们出来吧。

3、出示词语：光滑玻璃信箱信封道歉顿时破碎攒钱

指名读，一人一行。

第一行，读玻璃，再读轻声。（这里，单击玻璃，会有轻生词语出现）

第二行，指名读。

第三行，指名读，你把这2个平舌音都读正确了，当小老师读。指名读，齐读。

齐读这三行。

去掉拼音，开火车读。

观察一下，你会用什么好办法记住哪个生字？

观察玻璃，都是王字旁，这是因为王在古时候跟“玉”的意思一样，你看玻璃晶莹剔透，就像玉石一样，所以玻璃都是王字旁。

4、指名读长句子：

①我拾起一块光滑的小石头，把它扔了出去。

②我们听到玻璃破碎的声音，就像兔子一样飞快地逃走了。

③我决定把送报纸的钱攒起来，给她修理窗户。

④我把钱和一张便条装进信封，在便条上向老奶奶说明了事情的经过，并真诚地向她道歉。

⑤一直等到天黑，我才悄悄地来到老奶奶家门前，把信封投到她家的信箱里。

⑥我心里顿时感到一阵轻松。

5、反馈(板书：老奶奶小男孩)

小组讨论，老奶奶为什么夸奖小男孩？

出示填空：一个风和日丽的下午，小男孩不小心把（）。他把送报纸的钱（），并写了一张便条向老奶奶（）。老奶奶为小男孩这样做感到（）。

6、这个小男孩把老奶奶家的玻璃砸碎了，却得到了老奶奶的夸奖，到底是个怎样的孩子呢？接下来，请小朋友快速浏览课文，找一找描写小男孩的心情的词语，把这些词语画出来。

三、学习课文第1到3自然段，体会小男孩的开心、害怕、不自在

1、自由读课文，找到描写小男孩心情的词语，

反馈(板书：开心害怕不自在轻松)

2、小男孩为什么会有这些复杂的心理变化呢？我们一起来体会体会他的内心感受。

3、哪句话写出了小男孩很开心？

出示句子：我们看着石头像子弹一样射出，又像流星一样从天而降，觉得很开心，很有趣。

⑴指名读。

⑵比较句子：a我们看着石头扔出，落下，觉得很开心，很有趣。

b我们看着石头像子弹一样射出，又像流星一样从天而降，觉得很开心，很有趣。

指名读，你喜欢哪句？为什么？这句话把什么比作什么，又比作什么？(板书：子弹流星)

⑶在电视里见过开枪的画面吗？子弹射出的速度怎么样？施压，刚听到枪响，子弹已经射中目标了。

在夜晚的天空或者在电视中，你见过流星吗？流星总是一闪而过，那速度也很快，你想再看一眼，也看不见了。

⑷谁能通过朗读读出小石头的速度快？

⑸齐读。读着读着，我们仿佛来到了老奶奶家的后院，你仿佛看到了什么？好玩吗？开心吗？有趣吗？把开心、有趣的画面通过朗读展示给大家吧！

⑹小男孩和他的小伙伴在老奶奶家的后院扔石头，老奶奶知道吗？在第一自然段中，找一找，哪个词告诉你了？（板书：躲。）是呀，这些小朋友都是偷偷摸摸地玩扔石头的游戏的，怪不得这么开心，有趣。

谁再来读读这句描写小男孩开心的句子。（评，通过你的朗读，让我仿佛看到了他们脸上的笑容。评：听到了他们高兴的笑声）

齐读。

4、为什么害怕？俗话说，乐极生悲，播放玻璃破碎的声音，发生什么事了？

①指生说。（因为把老奶奶家的玻璃打碎了。）

②自由读第二自然段，找出小男孩怎么把老奶奶家的玻璃打碎的句子。

出示句子：我拾起一块

③指名读，找出写小男孩打碎玻璃的动作的词，用标出。板书：（拾、扔、砸）

④抓住动词，我们一起读读这句话。

听到玻璃砸破的声音，小男孩会想些什么（会有什么感受）

小男孩心里可害怕啦，他怕什么？

⑤出示：我们听到玻璃破碎的声音，就像兔子一样飞快地逃走了。

这句话也用了比喻，把什么比作什么？兔子逃得快吗？小兔子啊，你为什么要这么拼命逃啊？（不逃，几没有命了）

那你们逃什么呀？（闯祸了）（板书：逃）

哦，那你们现在就跟这只受了惊吓的兔子一样了。

指导朗读。那你们谁能通过朗读把他们这种害怕读出来。自由读，指名读。（评，你读出了他们的害怕。评，呀，逃跑得真快呀！）

逃跑能解决问题吗？是的，不能。那天晚上，（出示句子）做错了事，真是连睡觉也睡不好啊！

5、不自在

孩子们，开始觉得很开心很有趣现在又害怕得逃跑的小男孩儿接下来会发生什么变化呢？轻声读第三自然段

出示：这以后，我还是和往常一样，每天给她送报纸。她也和往常一样，微笑着跟我打招呼，我却觉得很不自在。

1）、我们一起来读读这个句子。

2）、小男孩还是和往常一样，干什么？（每天给老奶奶送报纸）

老奶奶也和往常一样，干什么？（微笑着跟我打招呼）

谁给往常找个近义词，

往常，老奶奶向小男孩微笑着打招呼时，小男孩的心情是怎样的？（开心）

这以后，指的是什么事情发生以后，（小男孩打碎老奶奶家的玻璃后），现在，老奶奶向小男孩微笑着打招呼时，小男孩心里会怎么想？

是的，真是因为他后悔了，知错了，所以，他会面对老奶奶的微笑，会觉得很不自在。

3）、指导朗读，谁能读出小男孩的内疚、后悔呢？声音要小一些，慢一些

四、写字

1、师:觉得不自在的小男孩儿接下来会怎么做呢？我们下节课再接着去学习。因为生字宝宝可等不及啦，等着和你们交朋友呢，还有两个生字宝宝想请我的小朋友先把它请到书本上去呢，它们都害羞得躲起来啦，让我们一起来喊出它们来——玻璃。快拿起笔，端端正正地把它们写到田字格里去吧!

2、生写“骄傲、玻璃，继续”

3、师板书范写“玻璃”

4、展示

板书设计：

22.我为你骄傲

老奶奶

小男孩开心→害怕→不自在→轻松

子弹拾

流星扔

躲砸

逃

湖的设计教案 篇3

教学目的要求：

1、知识目标：理解文本所表现的内容，解开“我”与“地坛”两者之间的关系，领悟史铁生“荒芜冷落——生机盎然——活力永存”的心路历程。

2、能力目标：学习史铁生在此文本中采用的语言形式，期待今后作文中运用之。

教学重点：理解文本所表现的内容，解开“我”与“地坛”两者之间的关系，领悟史铁生“荒芜冷落——生机盎然——活力永存”的心路历程。

教学难点：学习史铁生在此文本中采用的语言形式，期待今后作文中运用之。

教学方法和学法指导：学生自主找出史铁生的心路历程，教师不断启发和点拨。同时让学生们不断训练句式的表达，以期进一步丰富自己的写作语言。

人生活在这个世界上不容易，我们要好好珍惜我们的所有，相信未来，热爱生命，食指如是说。但有时当我们身处险境和绝望境地的时候，我们似乎也有一种逃离与消沉，那么人应该怎样活呢?本单元的课文告诉我们答案。首先让我们来看看史铁生是怎样最终对生命的阐悟与释然的呢?教师板书课题：我与地坛。

我们来看看史铁生与地坛是怎样地联系在一起的呢?

今天我们学《我与地坛(节选)》，让我们一起来体验一条不幸命运的救赎之路。请大家花几分钟默读这篇文章。(对照词语手册中的生字词注音)

1、请大家说说，残废了的史铁生最后为什么没有选择死?(以此问题理顺全文总思路)

教师明确：(1)、求生的本能。(2)、在地坛中思考了“要不要死”“为什么生”“应该怎样活”三个问题。

最后得出结论：

“要不要死”——“死是一件不必急于求成的事，死是一个必然会降临的节日”

“为什么生”——“一个人，出生了，这就不再是一个可以辩论的问题，而只是上帝交给他的一个事实”

“怎样活”——在地坛中得到启示。

3、怎样理解：“死是一件不必急于求成的事，死是一个必然会降临的节日”?

教师明确：这是作者对生命的理解与感悟。在经历了截瘫及孤独的悲痛之后，作者从地坛的一草一木，领悟了死的真谛：死是一种人生的必然，就像生一样。作者从“死亡的陷阱”中逃生，走出了死亡的阴影，黑暗将使他更加珍惜光明，经历了“死亡”将使他更加珍惜生命，这样，作者便坦然了：他将笑迎必然降临的节日。

(一)、史铁生为什么选择了地坛?(以此问题，引出学生对于两者共同点的思考，并且也顺带引入了史铁生的个人介绍。)

明确：史铁生之所以选择地坛而不是天坛之类，那是因为他跟地坛之间有许多共同点。此时，史铁生这个人的遭遇，正如同被冷落的地坛一样，都是荒芜的，在感情上觉得是被社会遗弃的，两者在精神上是共通的。

16岁时从清华大学附中初中毕业。

18岁时响应“上山下乡”的号召，主动去陕北农村插队落户。

21岁时因积劳成疾回北京住进医院，那一天正是他的生日，他从此以后再也没有站立起来。

(二)、

1、地坛的景物有些怎样的特点?它们都给你怎样的感受?

淡褪了门壁上炫耀的朱红，

坍圮了一段段高墙，又散落了玉砌雕栏，

祭坛四周的老柏树愈见苍幽，到处的野草荒藤也都茂盛得自在坦荡。

总结：荒芜的，古旧的，被人遗弃但生命依然顽强的。比如“剥蚀”了“浮夸”，“淡褪”了“炫耀”，最终留下了生命中原生的真正属于本质性的东西。

2、史铁生在地坛里看到哪些动植物的生存状态?反映了怎样的一种生命意识?

蜂儿如一朵小雾稳稳地停在半空;

蚂蚁摇头晃脑捋着触须，猛然间想透了什么，转身疾行而去;

瓢虫爬得不耐烦了，累了，祈祷一会儿便支开翅膀，忽悠一下升空了;

树干上留着一只蝉蜕，寂寞如一间空屋;

露水在草叶上滚动，聚集，压弯了草叶，轰然坠地，摔开万道金光;

满园子都是草木竞相生长弄出的响动，窸窸窣窣窸窸窣窣片刻停。

总结：这个世界里没有苦痛的意识，生与灭，动与静，都是那么自然而然。

3、朗读六个“譬如”章节，品味语言，感悟心灵。

教师明确：譬如祭坛石门中的落日，寂静的光辉平铺的—刻，地上的每一个坎坷都被映照得灿烂;

譬如在园中最为落寞的时间，—群雨燕便出来高歌，把天地都叫喊得苍凉;譬如冬天雪地上孩子的脚印，总让人猜想他们是谁，曾在哪儿做过些什么、然后又都到哪儿去了;

譬如那些苍黑的古柏，你忧郁的时候它们镇静地站在那儿，你欣喜的时候它们依然镇静地站在那儿，它们没日没夜地站在那儿从你没有出生一直站到这个世界上又没了你的时候;

譬如暴雨骤临园中，激起一阵阵灼烈而清纯的草木和泥土的气味，让人想起无数个夏天的事件;

譬如秋风忽至，再有——场早霜，落叶或飘摇歌舞或坦然安卧，满园中播散着熨帖而微苦的味道。

总结：如果说第五段的景物史铁生还是带着苦闷在看，那么这六个“譬如”中的苦闷，怕是已经少很多了吧。感情色彩已经发生了变化。

4、从这六个譬如中我们来感受史铁生的“语言形式”有什么特点?

教师明确：这些句子相当有艺术性，而且其中的词与词之间的搭配也是别出心裁的，比如雨燕把天地叫喊得苍凉，暴雨激起一阵阵灼烈而清纯的草木和泥土的气味，再比如，味道是熨帖而微苦的，等等，这些新奇的搭配，放到试卷上，叫病句，放到作品中，那就叫文学。史铁生的语言是一种繁复的美。可模仿。

5、史铁生对死这个问题最终想通来自对自然的启发、自己的思考，但还有一种最重要的因素是母亲对他的影响。试着阅读写母亲的部分，思考：文章标题是“我与地坛”，但第二部分是写母亲，母亲与地坛之间又有着什么共通的东西呢?

地坛是我的精神家园，母亲是我生命的依托。

地坛历尽沧桑，母亲饱受磨难。

地坛沉默，母亲不语。

不但作者与地坛有相似性，母亲与地坛也有相似性，由此看来，第一部分不仅仅有铺垫的作用，作者也赋予了地坛以更多的内涵，荒芜的陈迹处处散发着生命的火花，闪耀着灵性的光辉。“我”、“母亲”、“地坛”三个“意象”组成了这样的“意境”：风风雨雨中，地坛安详而忠实地等候着我;日日夜夜里，母亲焦灼而惊恐地牵挂着我。

地坛给了我生命的不屈意志，也见证了母爱的无私伟大。作者正是通过感悟地坛而解读母亲。

6、“哀莫大于心死”，但就本文而言，却是“痛莫大于心不死”，你看，儿子的不幸遭遇带给母亲深深的伤痛，母亲的过早去世留给儿子阵阵的苦痛。尤其令作者痛悔不已的是，母亲活着的时候，时时刻刻为他惊恐而担忧;而当他渐渐地走出阴影，并且取得能让母亲欣慰的成就时，母亲却在49岁的年龄上告别了人世——“我在这头，母亲在那头”……对普通如我们一般的读者来说，阅读《我与地坛》，更能产生共鸣、产生强烈震撼的或许正是第二部分。是的，孩子的每一次自由都是母亲无尽的担忧，儿女的每一份磨难都是母亲加倍的伤痛。

四、作业示范：

除去几座殿堂我无法进去，除去那座祭坛我不能上去而只能从各个角度张望它，地坛的每一棵树下我都去过，差不多它的每一平方米草地上都有过我的车轮印。无论是什么季节，什么天气，什么时间，我都在这园子里呆过。有时候呆一会儿就回家，有时候就呆到满地上都亮起月光。记不清都是在它的哪些角落里了。我一连几小时专心致志地想关于死的事，也以同样的耐心和方式想过我为什么要出生。这样想了好几年，最后事情终于弄明白了：一个人，出生了，这就不再是一个可以辩论的问题，而只是上帝交给他的一个事实;上帝在交给我们这件事实的时候，已经顺便保证了它的结果，所以死是一件不必急于求成的事，死是一个必然会降临的节日。这样想过之后我安心多了，眼前的一切不再那么可怕。比如你起早熬夜准备考试的时候，忽然想起有一个长长的假期在前面等待你，你会不会觉得轻松一点，并且庆幸并且感激这样的安排?

剩下的就是怎样活的问题了，这却不是在某一个瞬间就能完全想透的，不是能够一次性解 决的事，怕是活多久就要想它多久了，就像是伴你终生的魔鬼或恋人。所以，十五年了，我还是总得到那古园里去，去它的老树下或荒草边或颓墙旁，去默坐，去呆想，去推开耳边的嘈杂，理一理纷乱的思绪，去窥看自已的心魂。十五年中，这古园的形体被不能理解它的人肆意雕琢，幸好有些东西是任谁也不能改变它的。譬如祭坛石门中的落日，寂静的光辉平铺的一刻，地上的每一个坎坷都被映照得灿烂;譬如在园中最为落寞的时间，一群雨燕便出来高歌，把天地都叫喊得苍凉;譬如冬天雪地上孩子的脚印，总让人猜想他们是谁，曾在哪儿做过些什么，然后又都到哪儿去了;譬如那些苍黑的古柏，你忧郁的时候它们镇静地站在那儿，你欣喜的时候它们依然镇静地站在那儿，它们没日没夜地站在那儿，从你没有出生一直站到这个世界上又没了你的时候;譬如暴雨骤临园中，激起一阵阵灼烈而清纯的草木和泥土的气味，让人想起无数个夏天的事件;譬如秋风忽至，再有一场早霜，落叶或飘摇歌舞或坦然安卧，满园中播散着熨帖而微苦的味道。味道是最说不清楚的。味道不能写只能闻，要你身临其境去闻才能明了。味道甚至是难于记忆的，只有你又闻到它你才能记起它的全部情感和意蕴。所以我常常要到那园子里去。(史铁生《我与地坛》节选)

1.请从选段中找三个字来概括史铁生思考过的三个人生问题。(3分)

▲生 、 死 ▲ ▲活 .

2.关于出生和死亡的问题，作者思考出什么样的结论?请分别摘抄原文一句话来回答。(2分)

明确： 出生“是上帝交给他的一个事实”，死亡“是一件不必急于求成的事”，或者“是一个必然会降临的节日。”

3.“所以我常常要到那园子里去”，请综合两段文字简要回答常到园子里去的原因。(3分)

明确： 园子使我从绝望的阴影中走了出来，园子让我懂得怎样去生活，园子是我的精神家园。

4.下面是对两段选文的理解和赏析，正确的二项是(2分) ( A D )

A. “这样想了好几年”中的“这样”是指“一连几小时专心致志地想关于死的事，也以同样的耐心和方式想过我为什么要出生”。

B.作者在地坛里终于弄明白出生和死亡都是上帝安排好了的，人只要顺其自然就行，这种想法带着宿命论色彩，是消极可悲的。

C.“怎样活的问题”“就像是伴你终生的魔鬼或恋人”，魔鬼比喻这个问题消耗人的精神和

体力，恋人比喻这个问题让人心情愉快。

D.对于“怎样活”这个问题，作者并没有直接回答，而是列举了地坛里的种种景物，从它们身上获得启迪，这样写显得含蓄有味。

五、总结全文。

湖的设计教案 篇4

一、教学内容分析

本节教材是学生初次学习质量单位。由于质量单位比较抽象，仅靠观察使不够的，因此，教材注意引导学生通过多种实际操作活动进行感知，尤其重视对学生估计能力的培养，增加学生对克和千克的感性认识，并联系实际，使学生初步体验克和千克在生活中的应用。

二、学生情况分析

在日常的生活中，学生对物体的轻重已经积累了一些感性的认识，对常用的质量单位也有了初步的了解，但是对于三年级的孩子们而言，要建立千克与克的质量观念还是有一些挑战性的。

三、我的思考

学生对常用的质量单位了解能有多少？

四、教学目标

1、在具体的生活情境中，使学生感受并认识质量单位克和千克，初步建立1克和1千克的观念，知道1千克=1000克。

2、在建立质量观念的基础上，培养学生估量物体质量的意识。

3、通过操作、观察，使学生知道如何使用秤，培养操作和解决问题的能力，增强生活意识。

五、教学重难点

初步建立千克、克的质量观念。

教学难点：灵活运用千克、克这两个单位。

六、教学资源

天平秤、两个球、绿豆、铅笔、鸡蛋、苹果、盐、2分硬币盐（每组2袋）、2分硬币（每组1枚）

湖的设计教案 篇5

自读重点：

1、理解本诗中“草莓”和“上帝”指代的具体内容及诗歌蕴涵的寓意。

2、扩展阅读：赏析芒克的诗《阳光中的向日葵》，理解诗中蕴涵的寓意。

明确：两个。一是小孩子想摘草莓而又有所顾忌，另一个是上帝如果也是小孩，也会爬过篱笆去摘草莓。

1、诗中的草莓指什么。

明确：草莓指代世间美好的事物。思考这一问题应从草莓的特点入手。草莓色泽鲜艳，圆润可爱，在外形上给人以美感；味道酸甜可口，是人们所喜爱的一种水果。

2、“我”想不想爬过篱笆？为什么？

明确：想。因为那儿“有草莓一棵”，而且“草莓，真甜！”

3、“我”能不能爬过？为什么？

4、那么，“我”愿不愿爬过？为什么？

5、上帝又指代什么？

明确：上帝号令一切，具有至高无上的权力，他是权威的代表，又是正统思想上的化身。思考这一问题应从上帝特殊的身份入手。

6、如何理解“我”“想爬过”“能爬过”却又因为怕脏了围裙挨上帝的骂而不愿爬过？联系生活实际，谈谈你的感受。

明确：“想爬过”“能爬过”，是“我”有追求最美好事物的愿望和能力，而怕脏了围裙挨骂则说明“我”在追求美好事物的过程中有种种顾虑，担心会遭受责备。归根到底，这一切是“上帝”的行为约束、思想禁锢造成的。

联系实际示例：

孩子本是纯真无邪的，他们活泼好动，对一切美好的事物抱有强烈的好奇心，这其中蕴藏着多少创造的萌芽啊。但我们现存的教育制度，不允许孩子有任何不合常规的行为，用很多清规戒律来束缚他们的思想，压制他们的个性，从而扼杀了他们的创新能力。

7、作者安排“上帝”这个形象有什么深刻的寓意？

明确：由上面分析可知，“上帝”是权威的代表，是正统思想的化身，是别人思想的禁锢者；其实“上帝”又何尝不是被禁锢者呢？只要他愿意并且有决心抛开一切束缚，走下神坛，重新捡拾起纯真，他也会按自己的本性自主行事，去追求心目中美好的东西。

背景资料: 狄金森的短诗，风格独特，以文字细腻、观察敏锐、意象突出著称。她极其看重自己的诗歌创作，尊崇诗人为世界的“一切”。她忠实于自己诗性的思维和感觉，在几乎足不出户的日子里，她用自己与花草小鸟的对话、与自我内心情感的对话，用童心童趣、用爱的期待和绝望，构筑起一个诗歌的王国。

她的诗如同她的生活，只在于追逐自己对人生的理解。在她的诗作中，你甚至读不到任何的时代背景，比如说在很多作家笔下得到反映的南北战争、欧洲革命运动、以及社会变革、文坛论争。因而，有的评论家这样论及狄金森的创作：“只有时间，而没有时代；只有空间，而没有世界；只有上帝和死神，而没有人群。”

在形式上，她的`诗作并不固守传统格律，用语简练，明白如话，习惯用破折号形成诗句的起伏跳动。

她可以用最最寻常的意象、最最平实的语句造就一种独特惊人的意境，具有令人倾心的创造性。像她的《等待一小时太久》现在已成为被人屡屡借用的构思方式。其他如《上帝真是个嫉妒的上帝》、《我为美而死》、《因为我不能停步等死神》等都是隽永、灵动的。

读狄金森的诗，永远不会感到乏味。因为心里总是充盈了感动，为她心思的精巧、为她情怀的执著。因为一草一木，甚至上帝、甚至抽象的名词在她笔下都丰满而富有动感，蹦跳的文字轻易地就攫住了我们的视线和感觉。

读狄金森的诗，我们会觉得她在期待与绝望、挽留与失去、执著与永无可能中淡泊地追求着。她的诗让我们感到真善、真爱在心灵角落的熠熠闪光，同时又走不出那个角落。于是，身着一袭白衣的作者形象跃出了文本，忧郁而坚强地站在我们面前。

读狄金森的诗，我们的心灵也会像得到清泉的洗涤一样，变得空灵，变得洒脱。自然、生死、瞬间与永恒、感伤与喜悦、痛苦与满足，在她的笔下，那么轻描淡写又是如此深刻丰富。这是一个女性的感悟与智慧。

湖的设计教案 篇6

教学目标：1了解生动的外貌描写对塑造人物形象的作用；

2学习本文通过传神的肖像描写刻画人物的写作方法；

3了解作者茨威格，了解托尔斯泰在世界文学史上的巨大贡献。

2体会比喻、夸张等修辞手法的作用。

教学难点：1了解生动的外貌描写对塑造人物形象的作用；

2体会文章丰富而深厚的人文内涵。

创意说明：采用板块式教学--通读课文，理清文章脉络；激情诵读，体会语言情感；细心研读，感悟文本；迁移拓展，摹写赛写。

请学生介绍列夫托尔斯泰（你对托尔斯泰了解多少？）列夫托尔斯泰是19世纪俄国的伟大作家，主要作品有长篇小说《战争与和平》《安娜卡列尼娜》《复活》等。课文中还提到了另外一位意大利文艺复兴时的伟大雕塑家、画家、建筑师和诗人，主要作品有浮雕《阶梯旁的圣母》、雕塑《大卫》、壁画《亚当与夏娃》等。

二、通读课文，理清文章脉络。

思考：

① 课文主要写了什么？大体可以分为几个部分？

学生讨论，明确：

本文是列夫托尔斯泰的“肖像画”（可参看前面的彩色插图）大体分为两个部分：（1－5）刻画托尔斯泰的外貌特征；（6－9）描写托尔斯泰那非同寻常的眼睛。

② 读完全文后，你有什么疑问？

鼓励学生大胆质疑，收集并整理疑难问题。

一、激情诵读，体会语言特色。

集体朗读第一部分（1－5），思考：

① 作者从那些方面来刻画托尔斯泰的外貌特征？

皱似树皮--喻黝黑的脸膛；

纠缠不清的树根--喻眉毛；

泡沫--喻鬈发；

像热带森林般浓密--须发；

卷起的滔滔白浪--大胡子。

③ 第2段的主要内容？托翁给人的印象是什么？写法上有什么特色？

明确：大量的排比。整个面部像粗制滥造的小屋；额头像树柴；皮肤像村舍外墙那样粗糙。“给人的印象：失调、崎岖、平庸，甚至粗鄙。

④ 第3－5段重点写了什么？作者细致刻画乐面部特征，那么托翁美吗?

明确：面部特征--重点写面容表情，毫无避讳地展示了托翁外貌丑陋的一面。穿戴方面、职业方面、社会角色方面--意在表明托尔斯泰属于俄国普通大众。托尔斯泰的外貌令拜访者感到失望。（身材特点、言行特征、待客的方式）

关键句：他与全体俄国人民同呼吸共命运--揭示这一点，也就是揭示出托尔斯泰的人生追求和心路历程。

⑤ 前半部分对托尔斯泰的描写，突出了哪两个特点？

一是托尔斯泰外貌的平庸甚至丑陋；二是他和普通人一样，混在人堆里分辨不出来。

二、细心研读，感悟文本。

精读6－9段，思考：

① 用一句话概括每段的描写眼睛的角度。

第9段：赞美托尔斯泰犀利的目光，同时揭示他人生的不幸。

②作者是如何刻画眼睛的，请找出你最喜欢的句子，读一读，并说说你喜欢的理由。

自由解读，言之有理即可。教师对学生的发言予以归纳。

第6段中（神奇的夸张和连珠的比喻）写出了托尔斯泰眼睛深刻、准确的洞察力。

第7段中连续用两组排比句式，写托尔斯泰的眼睛可以抒发各种各样的感情。还引用了高尔基地话，运用夸张，干脆有力，耐人寻味，很好地表现了托尔斯泰眼睛的观察力、敏锐性和丰富性，写出了托尔斯泰那种能把万事万物尽收眼底的全方位的观察力。他的作品反映了社会生活的各个层面，课文中有一句话可作对比的注释：再小的事物借助这副透镜都能看得清清楚楚，……这对眼睛连最微不足道的细节都不放过，同样还能揭示广袤无垠的宇宙。

第8段中的“这对珠宝有魔力，有磁性，可以把人世间的物质吸进去，然后向我们这个时代放射出精确无误的电波……”对托尔斯泰眼睛的描写，已经不再限于肖像描写了，而是含蓄地揭示了托尔斯泰作为伟大的现实主义艺术家，对他所处的时代作出准确、深入、全面的描绘，成为时代的代言人。因为他的文学创作，既来自对社会生活、人间世态的观察、研究，同时又用他的艺术巨笔把它们准确地表现出来，展示了时代的本职和要求。

“当这一副寒光四射的匕首转而对准它们的主人时是十分可怕的，因为锋刃无情，直戳要害，正好刺中了他的心窝。”这句话写出了托尔斯泰作为“清醒的现实主义作家”，对现实的批判是及其深刻而准确的。作为19世纪俄罗斯现实主义顶峰的代表，托尔斯泰的笔锋几乎指向了社会的各个方面，特别是对沙皇的专制、法律的虚伪、贵族的腐朽、农民的贫困原因，无不给予深刻的揭示。这在他晚年的长篇巨著《复活》里表现得尤为充分。他的作品引起沙皇政府的恐慌，曾企图将他监禁或流放，但慑于他的声望和社会舆论而中止。

①     合作探究：

A. 结合全文，说一说作者为何要写托尔斯泰粗鄙的外貌？

B. 你是如何理解作者重点描写眼睛的用意？

明确：

A. 欲扬先抑，突出眼睛的威力，这样描写使人物形神皆备，给读者留下了深刻的印象。

B.     赞美托尔斯泰犀利的眼光，揭示托尔斯泰观察社会、人生、时代的广阔和深细，以

及批判的广度和深度，同时揭示他人生的不幸。

五、延伸训练。

仔细观察自己，用100~150字写一幅自画像，只写头部，描写要逼真详细，独特处更不能忽略，适当运用比喻和夸张，写作时不署名，不注明性别，写好后交给老师，再进行全班交流。

六、课堂小结。

[列夫托尔斯泰 教案教学设计]

湖的设计教案 篇7

2、理解课文，体会作者对秋雨的喜爱和赞美之情。

3、有感情地朗读课文。

教学重点、难点：

1、 作者从哪几个方面描写秋天的。

2、 能用自己喜欢的方式表达自己对秋雨的喜爱。

1、口语训练：夏天还没走远，秋天的小雨点就蹦着、跳着把秋天给我们送来 ，让我们来赞美秋天吧！

2、学生交流，教师指导说话。

过渡：美丽的秋天来到了我们身边，那么就让我们走进秋天的雨里，细细品味美丽的秋景吧！

1、教师配乐范读课文。

师：听完老师的朗读，我想你们一定被秋天的雨深深地打动了，快来说说你的感受吧！

2、学生交流感受。（引导说出“难忘”，“神奇”引导学生把话说完整。）

过渡：神奇的秋雨轻轻地为我们送来美丽的秋天，昨天，老师让同学们预习了课文，我相信大家生字一定会认了，下面我们就来响亮地读读吧！

2、读词。

重点指导：“爽”，指导写法，教师田字格写，学生学习写法，书空。“扇”，多音字的应用。

3、学生本上练写。

过渡：大家生字掌握的这么棒，老师真为你们高兴，不知道你们课文读的是不是也这么棒？（课件出示自渎要求：（1）、课文有几个自然段，每个自然段主要讲了什么呢？（2）课文是哪几个方面写秋天的雨的？）

四、自读课文，研文学文。

1、学生读自学要求，学生带要求自由读课文。

师：大家认真读读课文每个自然段的第一句话，用直线画出来，（学生画句子朗读）。

过渡：大家概括的非常好，在文章中，作者在每个自然段的开头第一句总结概括了这个自然段的意思，这种句子叫总启句。

师：大家看，这几句话连起来，就像一首优美的小诗，让我们来美美的读一读吧！！

(2)学生朗读小诗。

(3)学生交流从哪几个方面描写秋雨的。

过渡：秋天的雨是一把神奇的钥匙，给我们打开了秋天的大门，让我们来走进秋天里吧！

朗读要求：秋天的雨是怎么打开秋天的大门的？仔细读文。

（1）学生读文。

过渡：秋天的雨趁我们没留意，给我们把秋天的大门打开了，给我们带来了一个什么样的秋天？

（2）默读第二自然段，找出表示颜色的词语，把它圈出来。

（3）学生交流（出示第二自然段）把你喜欢的颜色的句子多读几遍。

（4） 学生练读，指名读。（随机课件出示银杏叶，枫叶等，教师指导朗读）

（5） 学生配乐朗读。

过渡：听了你们的朗读真是美的享受，现在老师增加点难度，你们能不能背下来？

6、 说话训练：

师：秋雨给秋天带来的颜色可不止这几种，我们学着课文的样子也来说说吧！

（1）（课件出示：瞧！秋天的雨把这些颜色还给了谁？小朋友快点想想吧！

1.秋天的雨把紫色给了葡萄 ，（        ）像（            ）。

2.秋天的雨把红色给了苹果，（          ）像（           ）。

3.秋天的雨把（        ）色给（       ），（             ）像（             ）。）

（2） 学生自由发言交流。

五、总结全课：在你们的帮助下，秋天变的更美丽了，作者从四个方面让我们看到了一个五彩缤纷，硕果累累的秋天，下节课让我们继续领略秋雨的神奇吧！

板书设计：

教学反思：一直以来，我总觉得学语文是为了生活，生活中又处处是语文，只有将生活与学习结合起来，注重学生的体验，实现“语文生活化，生活语文化”，学生才会乐意学语文。

《秋天的雨》这篇抒情意味很浓的散文，名为写秋雨，实际在写秋天。作者抓住秋天的特点，从秋天的到来写起，写了秋天缤纷的色彩，秋天丰收的景象，还有深秋各种动物、植物准备过冬的情景。七、八岁的孩子很难直接通过抽象的语言体会秋天的美好，理解那么有诗意的语言。

因此，一开课，我让学生赞美秋景，让他们体验秋天的美丽，将生活体验带入课堂，使他们在课堂中感受生活。然后配乐范读课文，让学生在优美的音乐中感受秋雨带来的景色。

教学课文第二段时，注重以读为本，在教学中我本着这节课的重点引导学生初步学习中心句，联系上下文理解词语 ，重点理解“五彩缤纷”的意思。针对不同的内容设计了

很多种形式的读。让学生体会文章的语言美，从而让学生积累语言。但在实施过程中，读得还没有达到我想要的目标，指导朗读上有些欠缺，在教学中没有渗透作文要求有些遗憾这节课的教学我自己是不大满意的，虽然领会了文章的主旨、神韵、风格，但没有在教学中真正达到那方面的要求，没有让学生受到熏陶感染。今后，在各类文本的教学活动中，我应该精益求精地预设，和谐自然地生成，不求多，只求实，让每个学生在短暂的四十分钟里快乐地学习，同时，也有所收获。

[秋天的雨 教案教学设计]

湖的设计教案 篇8

教学目的：

一、抓住关键句，品味揣摩作者深沉绵密而富有哲理意味的语言。

二、熟读课文，解读作者对本文的哲理性思考,培养学生面对苦难的承受能力。

三、通过学习，体味作者对亲情的独特感悟,体会母爱的伟大,培养学生养成珍惜自己眼前的拥有,学习体谅父母进而宽容待人的健康生活观。

教学重点：地坛和母亲对我生命求索的启示，我、地坛、母亲三者之间的关系 。

教学步骤 ：

导语 : 有这样一个人，从小生长在北京城，16岁时从清华大学附中初中毕业，18岁时响应“上山下乡”的号召，主动去陕北农村插队落户，21岁时因积劳成疾回北京住进医院，那一天正是他的生日，他从此以后再也没能站立起来。曾有的年少轻狂，所有的豪情壮志一下子都成了海市蜃楼，他一度痛不欲生。后来，在母亲的奔走下进了街道的一家小厂，每天在那里画彩蛋。再后来，他成了一名作家，当他第一次获奖，他的健康的朋友们把他从轮椅上抬为他欢呼时，他一直倔强的昂着头，但委屈的泪水却忍不住流淌下来。这个人就是史铁生，今天让我们看看他是如何走出当时那痛不欲生的困境的。

问：本文标题是《我与地坛》，但是作者仅仅是写了我和地坛吗？ 还写了母亲。

现在请同学们迅速找出第一句能把“我”、“地坛”、“母亲” 三者联系在一起的句子。

答：在第八自然段“当年我总是独自跑到地坛去，曾经给母亲出了一个怎样的难题”。

1、问：他是“跑”到地坛去的吗？不是。那又是如何去的？他怎么了？（用课文的原句来回答）

“我摇着轮椅进入园中” ，“活到最狂妄的年龄上忽地残废了双腿”。

2、问：“独自”跑到地坛去。为什么“独自”去？那是一种什么样的心境？找出课文的句子来分析。

“在满园弥漫的沉静光芒中，一个人更容易看到时间，并看见自己的身影。”写出了作者那时的孤独、颓废忧郁、痛苦自伤的心境。

3、问：“总是”到地坛去。为什么“总是”到地坛去？（用课文原句来回答）

“仅为着那儿是可以逃避一个世界的另一个世界” 作者到那里去是为了逃避，像个遇到伤害的鸵鸟一样想把自己藏起来。

6、听录音朗诵。考虑作者描写了哪些景物，是如何体现地坛“荒芜但并不衰败”这一特点的。？

同学找出写“荒芜”的句子。并简要分析此处作者的语言。

同学找出写“不衰败”的句子；稍分析此处景物的特点。

7、这些景物给了作者什么启示？

启示：一个人，出生了，这就不再是一个可以辩论的问题，而只是上帝交给他的一个事实；上帝在交给我们这件事实的时候，已经顺便保证了它的结果，所以死是一件不必急于求成的'事，死是一个必然会降临的节日。

即生是一个不可辩驳的问题；死是一件不必急于求成的事。

8、这个启示使作者的命运起到了什么样的变化？

“我安心多了，眼前的一切变得不再那么可怕”。决定面对所遭遇的苦难打击，不再逃避、颓废和自伤，就是他“决定”活下来了。

9、听这一段景物描写的录音，思考此段描写对作者思考“怎样活”的问题有何作用？

这些环境的永恒特点给作者思考“怎样活”提供了一种氛围和启示。所以说我与地坛的关系十分密切，她让我在那里找回生存的勇气和决心。用课文的词语来说是有一种“宿命”的“缘分”。甚至可以说是作

湖的设计教案 篇9

理解本诗中“草莓”和“上帝”指代的具体内容及诗歌蕴含的深刻寓意。

扩展阅读：赏析芒克的诗《阳光中的向日葵》，理解诗中蕴含的深刻寓意。

这是一首蕴含着深刻寓意的哲理诗，理解诗歌的寓意是学习本诗的重点，也是难点。。

明确：两个。一是小孩想摘草莓而又有所顾忌，另一个是上帝如果也是小孩，也会爬过篱笆去摘草莓。

明确：草莓指代世间美好的事物。思考这一问题应从草莓的特点入手。草莓色泽鲜艳，圆润可爱，在外形上给人以美感；味道酸甜可口，是人们都喜爱的一种水果。

2．“我”想不想爬过篱笆？为什么？

明确：想。因为那儿“有草莓一棵”，而且“草莓，真甜！”

3．“我”能不能爬过？为什么？

那么，“我”愿不愿爬过？为什么？

明确：上帝号令一切，具有至高无上的权力，他是权威的代表，又是正统思想的化身，或代表着种种清规戒律。思考这一问题应从上帝特殊的身份入手。

6．如何理解“我”“想爬过”、“能爬过”却又因为怕脏了围裙挨上帝的骂而不愿爬过？联系生活实际，谈谈你的感受。

明确：“想爬过”“能爬过”，是“我”有追求美好事物的愿望和能力，而怕脏了围裙挨骂则说明“我”在追求美好事物的过程当中有种种顾虑，担心会遭受责备。归根到底，这一切是“上帝”的行为约束、思想禁锢造成的。

联系实际示例：

孩子本是纯真无邪的，他们活泼好动，对一切美好的事物抱有强烈的好奇心，这其中蕴藏着多少创造的萌芽啊。但我们现存的教育制度，不允许孩子有任何不合常规的行为，用很多清规戒律来束缚他们的思想，压制他们的个性，从而扼杀了他们的创新能力。

以上提供的`只是示例，并非唯一的标准的答案。教学中可以让学生联系生活实际，深入思考讨论，只要言之成理，教者即应加以肯定，答案不强求一致。

诗人为什么说“上帝”如果是孩子，他“也会爬过去“？

明确：孩子是纯真无邪的，孩子对美好的事物有本能的向往与追求。“上帝”如果抛开了至高无上的权力，抛开了一切清规戒律，恢复其纯真无邪的本性，他一定也会爬过去追求世间美好的事物。

作者安排“上帝”这个形象有什么深刻的寓意？

明确：由上面分析可知，“上帝”是权威的代表，是正统思想的化身，是别人思想的禁锢者；其实“上帝”又何尝不是被禁锢者呢？只要他愿意并且有决心抛开一切束缚，重新捡拾起纯真，他也会按自己的本性自主行事，去追求心目中美好的东西。

这一层次的理解是这首诗的深刻之处，学生不容易理解，如“上帝”也是被禁锢者这一点，教者要作适当的提示。

小结：集哲学和文学于一身，融理性和感情为一体，这是哲理诗的显著特点。而哲理诗的真正价值不在于训示式的说教，而在于悟性的启迪，学习时应由诗的表层意象入手，展开联想，逐层深入，最终触及主旨，才能理解诗歌中包容的深刻寓意。另外，哲理诗总会给读者留下思索的空间，留下某种不确定性，教学中应鼓励学生积极思考，用自己的理解来拓展诗歌的艺术空间。

欣赏芒克的诗《阳光中的向日葵》。从诗中的形象描绘入手，理解向日葵所指代的内容及诗中蕴含的深刻寓意。

明确：向日葵指代的是自我意识觉醒后与命运不屈抗争的人们。第一诗节侧重描绘向日葵抗争的神态。第二诗节着力揭示了向日葵抗争的意义或价值，向日葵一旦与它所依附的太阳抗争，则会改变其被支配的命运。第三诗节揭示了向日葵与命运抗争所付出的惨重代价。向日葵的抗争是带血的抗争，是以自己的整个生命与命运的抗争，惨烈而悲壮。

这是一株不甘臣服的向日葵，尽管它曾经凭借太阳的能量，获得了自己依附的价值，但它最终要以顽强的抗争精神摆脱太阳对它的压制，从而获得自己独立的存在价值。这一形象喻示着人们自我意识的逐渐觉醒，一向承受着历史惨重折磨的人最终会以抗争的方式去肯定自我的存在价值。

这首诗的寓意是，要获得独立的自我价值，必须与命运抗争，哪怕付出惨重的代价。

湖的设计教案 篇10

wenzhoulmj  wenzhoulinmiaoji@   温州二十中学

2.了解课文运用的几种主要的说明方法。

3. 体会科学性和趣味性相结合的语言特点。

二、重难点：

了解课文运用的几种主要的说明方法。

阅读说明文应从事物的特点、说明顺序、说明方法和说明的语言等方面去掌握。我们写说明文也要从这四个方面入手。今天，我们先学习两篇科技说明文。

（2） 作者从哪几个方面介绍激光是一种特殊的光？

（3） 在介绍激光的这些特点的时候，作者运用了哪些说明方法？

打比方：

结尾归结全文，点题。

说明方法--作比较、分类别、列数字、举例子。

说明语言--准确、形象、生动。

5.布置作业：

选定说明对象，进行仔细观察或查阅搜集有关资料。

一、 教学目标：

1、 明确作文要求，指导学生列出写作提纲。

2、 学生完成说明文写作。

二、 重难点：

运用恰当的说明方法，指导学生完成说明文写作。

通过两篇范文的学习、比较，我们知道了怎样才能写好科技说明文：

（1） 要抓住事物的特点进行说明。

（2） 要善于根据内容的需要运用恰当的说明方法。

（3） 语言方面要力求做到准确、形象、生动，即体现科学性和趣味性相结合的特点。

布置写作范围，提示写作思路：

恰当地运用学过的说明方法。

用过或见过的科技制品；

现实生活中熟悉的科技知识。

湖的设计教案 篇11

宋代苏轼说过:文章不厌百回读，熟读深思理自知．今天我们就扣住读和思两个字来合作学习莫怀戚的散文《散步》．（板书）标题是作者与读者的第一接触点，面对散步这两个字，大家的头脑里可能会产生哪些问题呢？好，有的同学说：都有谁在散步？在哪里散步？还有同学说在什么时候散步？散步时可能会出现什么波折？为什么要去散步？同学们，大家看了课题，可能还会产生一些猜想，这篇课文大概会写些什么呢？有同学说：可能写一对恋人在散步时畅想美好的未来．还有同学说可能是一篇回忆性的文章，回忆跟好朋友在一起散步．还有个同学说课文可能是想通过散步来表达某种思想情感．同学们讲得很好，都开动了脑筋，进行了思维体操．你们的猜想不一定是确切的，但是合理的．这对培养同学们的阅读习惯、提高阅读兴趣有好处．以后看到文章的提目，读课文之前就可以进行一番想象．现在就请同学们带着问题和猜想大声的、自由地朗读．碰上拦路虎呢，同桌或者前后桌之间合作把它解决掉．

大家认认真真地读了一遍后，有什么想说的吗？有同学说原来这是一家四口人在南方初春的田野里散步．那老师追问了：他们为什么去散步呢？是因为我的母亲老了，应该出来多走走．还有吗？同桌之间可以交流下，两个思想进行碰撞一下。我觉得我年老的母亲应该去感受春天的气息，去体验生命的乐趣。老师问了，文章中四个人都是什么关系？祖孙三代．他们都是些什么关系？从他们身上，你感受最深的是哪一种情感．大家一起回答：亲情．（板书）

请大家再一次读课文，找出体现亲情的句子，还请同学们积累些让你感动的句子．如课文的`第二段．写母子情深．第五段，写一家人天伦之乐．我们都笑了，这是什么笑．同学们发现了吗？这一段的第一句重复写了我和母亲走在前面，我的妻子和儿子走在后面．这对表现亲情可有什么关系？同桌之间，可以讨论．表面上写几个人在散步？这样的顺序是不是我精心安排的？大家可以有不同的见解．写亲情的还有第六段第七第八段都有．综合同学们的回答，面对这些亲情你可以用哪些成语来概括．（妻贤子教、天伦之乐、尊老爱幼）（板书）．齐读第六段，你觉得课文中谁最听话．为什么？这里的听话包含了什么？要你说说，你看这一家子四口人中，谁的权力最大，谁有真正的决定权？当然，这仅仅是听话吗？它其实包含着谦让、亲情、

可从以下四个方面进行分析--具体结合多媒体进行推进。

那么究竟听谁的呢？--由“爱”决定，这个“爱”，对长辈来说，是“爱幼”；对子女来说，是“尊老”。同学们的回答都很到位，也很精彩．

同学们，有人说，语文是旋律优美的音乐，让人听之忘俗．语文是滋味甘醇的美酒，让人回味无穷．语文是色彩绚丽的花园，让人流连忘返．为什么我们的语文会有如此大的魅力呢？因为我们的语言丰富多彩，我们的语言富有表现力．

有人说，世界上并不缺少美，而是缺少发现美的眼睛．好，现在请同学们再一次用自己喜欢的方式读课文，进行寻美活动．请从课文中找出你觉得美的语句，思考一下它为什么美并把他背下来．一句可以，两句也可以，三句更好，四句更妙．

经过同学们的回答，我觉得同学们的记忆力和理解力都很出色，以后就要学会积累好词好句．现在请同学们认真思考，把刚才感性的美的词句上升到理性的四人小组探讨，语言品味可有它内在的规律性．

好，经过同学们的合作探讨后的发言，老师把本文语言特点归纳为精选词语（例如），大词小用，优美的自然景色色．句式的错落有致，生动的细节描写．在这节课将近尾声时，你觉得这篇文章最能打动你的心的是什么？我们一起来齐读最后一段．说说你是怎样理解这一段话的．--（“我”背的是母亲，妻子背的是儿子。母亲给我们以生命，而儿子又是这生命的延续。这血脉相连的三代人紧紧连接在一起，构成了生命的整体。如今，我们把母亲和儿子背在背上前行，正是背负着完整的生命世界，因而油然产生了一种深沉、庄严的感觉，这正是家庭生活中、人类社会中承前启后的一代中年人特有的心理感受。）

同学们都调动了自己的知识储备，以自己独特的体验说出自己独特的感受．亲情无价，说得一点都不错．让我们在赵民一家唱的＜让爱住我家＞的音乐声中结束这一课吧．谢谢大家．

湖的设计教案 篇12

1、能把握关键语句，概括文章的内容要点和主旨。

2、了解课文结构安排和景物描写的特点。

1、《风景谈》谈的内容（政治意义、美学意义）；

2、谈的方法（对照、烘托的手法；写景和写人相结合，递进式精辟议论贯穿六幅画面，使散文的“形”“神”达到完美统一的写法）

1、本文的构思，作者如何巧妙地“把政治寓于风景之中”。

2、从美学意义方面理解文章描写的几幅“风景”。

1、文章的美学意义，教学的难点最好能通过诉诸形象（多媒体情境教学）的方法让学生感悟。

【本课教学要点】：

提纲挈领，明确《风景谈》的谈锋所及，分析作者如何“把政治寓于风景之中”。

初中时我们曾学过茅盾的散文《白杨礼赞》，那篇散文曾以它崇高的境界和强烈的感情激动过我们的心。今天，我们再来学习一篇和它并称为姊妹篇的作品《风景谈》（板书）。这篇文章的写作背景和《白杨礼赞》相同，哪位同学能说说它的背景是怎样的？

（一）通读全文，简要概括本文谈了哪几幅风景？试给每幅风景各拟一个小标题。

第1幅“沙漠驼铃”第2幅“高原归耕”第3幅“延河夕照”

第4幅“石洞雨景”第5幅“桃林小憩”第6幅“北国晨号”

（二）提纲挈领：标题是文章的眼睛，散文多采用含蓄的标题，间接地揭示中心。《白杨礼赞》借白杨树不平凡的形象，赞美在中国共产党领导之下，坚持抗日的北方军民，歌颂他们朴质、坚强、力求上进的精神，属于托物言志。《风景谈》谈的是什么？属于什么表达方式？（学生速读课文，讨论。指名回答。）

明确：（1）题目“风景谈”，照字面理解就是谈风景，但是作者是“把政治寓于风景之中”的，实际上就是借“谈风景”来“谈政治”，赞扬延安儿女所表现的向上、坚毅的民族精神，属于借景抒情。这就要求我们通过风景来理解风景中所包含的政治的内容。

1、第1幅“沙漠驼铃”――写猩猩峡外沙漠的“风景”，说明人类比自然更伟大。

2、第2、3幅“高原归耕”、“延河夕照”――写延安儿女的劳动生活，说明充满崇高精神的人类活动尤其伟大。

3、第4、5幅“石洞雨景”与“桃林小憩”――写延安青年的学习和休息，说明人类高贵的精神填补了自然的贫乏。

4、第6幅“北国晨号”――写清晨山峰上两名战士的雄姿，说明中国共产党领导下的抗日军人是民族精神的化身，是伟大中之最伟大者。

（2）但这只是一个方面――它的政治意义。还有一个更深刻的方面，大家想想是什么呢？

学生讨论后，教师进行“启发式教学”（最好能通过PowerPornt中的幻灯片浏览模式演示两组照片：一组是纯风景，另一组是在此风景的背景上加上一些人的活动，要求学生联系生活经验思考：哪组照片更好，更有意义？）否则，只有让学生反复诵读课文，体会每一幅画面的构成要素有哪些，是什么使得平凡的环境构成了生动美丽的风景。

明确：《风景谈》这篇课文向我们揭示的一个真谛：人的精神境界的美赋于自然风光的美以生机，这也就是作者在文章中反复强调的“自然是伟大的，然而人类更伟大”所蕴含的意思。这是《风景谈》谈出的第二个方面――它的美学意义。

课文中把写景与写人的活动结合起来，那一幅幅美妙的画面是静穆的自然和充满活力的人组成，“人的活动”作为“风景”的组成部分，是风景不可分割的有机体；“风景”作为人的活动的环境，是衬托人的崇高精神的背景。落笔于绘景，着眼于写人，以景物突出人物，借风景来表现人的精神，“把政治寓于风景之中”，构思十分巧妙。

三、探究式讨论：

1、本文的六幅风景画面是按怎样的顺序组织起来的？

明确：是按作者对人类与自然的关系的认识逐步深化的顺序组织起来的。作者在写景的过程中运用严密的语言，进行一些简短的议论。这些议论都写了自然与人的关系，猛然看起来似乎差别不大，但仔细玩味，就可体会到其揭示的含义是逐步深化的（请看每幅画面后面的议论语言）。

2、五段议论性文字在文章的思想表达和结构组织上起了什么作用？

明确：五处议论，连缀了六幅内容不同的风景画，形成了一个整体，成为了一幅历史长卷。五处议论是贯穿全文的主线，揭示了各幅“风景画”的画旨，又层层深入地表现了文章的中心，是统帅全文思想内容的“神”。五处议论，如同乐曲中的`主旋律，间隔出现，使文章具有鲜明的节奏感和清晰的层次，增强了音乐美。

【本课教学要点】分析写作特点（对照和烘托），解决难点。

1、课文为什么不直接标明主旨，而是借谈风景含蓄地谈政治？而且第一幅画面并不是在解放区，那为什么要写？

明确：上节课上我们已经知道，作者把篇名定为《风景谈》，是“把政治寓于风景之中”；再想想写作背景，我们可以体会到这么写有一定的掩护作用，便于发表，适应与国民党反动派斗争的需要；另外通过对沙漠的描绘，形象地告诉人们：即使是最单调、最平板的荒凉贫脊的沙漠地带，只要有了人的活动，面貌就会大大地改观，自然而然地引出了本文的文眼，它是层层深入地表现主题的第一台阶，是一曲交响曲中的“序曲”。

2、既然说到文眼，那么请回忆一下，这篇文章的文眼是什么呢？

学生：“自然是伟大的，然而人类更伟大”及贯穿全文的五处议论。这五处议论逐层深入，象一条红线把六幅画面串联起来，使它们成为一个有机的整体，这也就构成了文章的线索！

3、启发思考：文眼是作者对自然与人的关系的五处议论，那么文章在写作时运用了什么手法？

明确：运用对照和烘托的手法，使主题更加鲜明。如沙漠中“纯然一色”烘托“猩红大旗”；沙漠中形、声、色与驼队出现的形、声、色的对比；石洞中的一对与公园里一对儿的对照；静穆的大自然与弥漫着生命力的人的对照……把事物表现得鲜明醒目，强化了主题。

二、解决难点：

（一）教师范读（突出重点词语、句子，用不同的语调强化感情，声情并茂，以情感人），在读完每一部分后，依次分别讨论、明确下列四个难点问题。

（1）文章从看《塞上风云》预告片入笔有什么作用？（在讨论前，有条件的话，可通过投影仪播放一段《塞上风云》的电影剪辑。）

明确：《塞上风云》是反映抗战时期各民族团结抗战的爱国影片。作者在延安时期观看后，深受触动，回重庆写此文时，忆起在延安的所见所闻所感，自然激起感情的浪花，触动了记忆的闸门，这样开始下笔，就交代了写作的缘起，起到了领挈全文的作用。这与学过的《故乡的榕树》、《土地》两篇文章的开头的作用是相同的。

（2）“多少曾调朱弄粉的手儿”指谁的手？

明确：茅盾同志在病危之际，曾嘱托他的儿子韦韬说明：“（调朱弄粉的手儿）应指鲁艺的一些做文艺工作的女同志。”

（3）“更有两位虎头虎脑的青年，他们走过‘天下最难走的路’”一句中，“天下最难走的路”是指什么路？

明确：

A、他们年纪虽轻，但在他们这一代革命青年人来说，经历了诸多生活磨难，走过了曲折的人生道路。

B、当时的国民党反动派阻止全国各地奔赴革命圣地延安的爱国青年和文艺工作者，设置了重重关卡，因此爱国青年等人要冒着生命危险，克服自然的、人为的许多困难。

（在进行这一步时，可用投影仪播放一些各地青年克服困难，奔赴革命圣地延安的电影或历史资料片断）

（4）第六幅画面写小号兵时，为什么又加入了白天所见到的一张照片这个材料？[可用叠加的办法放映一幅山岗上小号兵

（左上、远景）和照片上小号兵（右下、近景）的幻灯片]

明确：这是因为山岗上的小号兵离得远，只能做粗线条的勾勒，照片上的号兵就在眼前，可以做细致的刻画，这里运用衬托的手法，使两者形象结合在一起，就使山岗上号兵的形象更加丰满，更加清晰了。

提问：学了课文，你觉得与姊妹篇《白杨礼赞》作比较，各有什么特色？

明确：《白杨礼赞》先写白杨树（实写），描绘和赞美黄土高原上的白杨树，铺垫后升华，篇末点明主题，赞美了北方农民，赞美了今天我们民族解放斗争中所不可缺少的质朴、坚强、力求上进的精神。立意比《风景谈》更明确，全文用了象征手法；《风景谈》在语言上比《白杨礼赞》更富有打上时代烙印的含蓄性。

湖的设计教案 篇13

人教版小学语文六年级上册第三组教材第9课。

1．学会12个生字。正确读写“舒适、抱怨、倾听、魁梧、撕破、严肃、忧虑、汹涌澎湃、湿淋淋、心惊肉跳、忐忑不安、自言自语、自作自受、缝缝补补”等词语。

2．默读课文，理解课文内容，感受桑娜和渔夫的勤劳、淳朴和善良，学习他们宁可自己受苦也要帮助他人的美德。

3．学习作者通过环境、人物对话和心理描写表现人物品质的写作方法。

引导学生感受桑娜和渔夫勤劳、善良、宁可自己受苦也要帮助他人的美德是教学重点。揣摩学习作者通过环境、人物对话和心理描写来表现人物品质的.写作方法是教学难点。

1．板书课题。

2．交流学生课前搜集的有关列夫·托尔斯泰的资料。教师根据学生交流情况适当补充。

［设计意图：开门见山导入新课，通过让学生交流搜集的有关作者的资料，激起学生对列夫·托尔斯泰这一世界级大作家的景仰之情，从而调动学生阅读课文的积极性。］

1．学生自读课文，遇到不认识的字、不懂的词语查字典。

2．学生练习朗读，达到通顺、流利、有感情。（教师适时检查学生朗读情况。）

3．初步概括课文主要内容：课文主要写了什么事？（课文讲的是渔夫和妻子桑娜，在邻居西蒙死后，主动收养她的两个孩子的故事。）

［设计意图：这一教学环节，把着力点放在学生自主学习上，让学生在准确流利朗读课文的基础上，初步把握主要内容，培养学生概括能力。］

1．请同学们再次默读课文，将课文分成三部分，并考虑每部分分别写了什么内容？

2．交流。

第一部分（1—2自然段），讲渔夫的妻子桑娜在寒风呼啸的夜晚，焦急地等待出海打鱼的丈夫回家。

第二部分（3—11自然段），讲桑娜出门探望丈夫是否归来，顺便去看望西蒙，发现西蒙已死，便把西蒙的两个孩子抱回家，然后忐忑不安地继续等待丈夫。

第三部分（12—27自然段），讲渔夫回家得悉西蒙死去，主动提出收养孤儿，夫妻俩的想法不谋而合。

［设计意图：引导学生理清课文的条理，把握作者的叙述脉络，进一步加深对内容的理解，并为进一步研读文本做好了铺垫。］

同学们，读了这个故事，你有何感受？（桑娜和渔夫的心地太善良了。）

渔夫和桑娜心地善良，他们有着一颗金子般的心。我们仅仅了解故事的梗概是不够的，大作家托尔斯泰用他的生花妙笔细腻传神地刻画了人物的性格特点，这需要我们仔细地去品味，去欣赏。就让我们再一次走进文本，进入人物的内心世界，去感悟主人公精神的高尚，同时领略大作家托尔斯泰高超的文学才华。

1．请同学们朗读1、2自然段，看看除了知道桑娜在等待丈夫出海归来这件事外，你还知道了什么？

2．交流。

（1）渔夫和桑娜十分勤劳。

你是从哪看出来的？

根据学生回答，课件出示：

屋外寒风呼啸，汹涌澎湃的海浪拍击着海岸，溅起一阵阵浪花。海上正起着风暴，外面又黑又冷，这间渔家的小屋里却温暖而舒适。地扫得干干净净，炉子里的火还没有熄，食具在搁板上闪闪发亮。挂着白色帐子的床上，五个孩子正在海风呼啸声中安静地睡着。

A．学生谈自己的理解。

B．这段文字先写了什么，再写了什么？（先写了屋外，再写了屋内。）

C．室内的描写是围绕哪个词语写的？（课件将“温暖而舒适”加上着重号。）

D．这所谓的“温暖而舒适”是什么样子的？

E．你认为应该怎样理解这所谓的“温暖而舒适”？

F．这所谓的“温暖而舒适”是靠什么取得的？

G．这段文字中渔夫和桑娜的勤劳，作者是直接写出来的吗？（不是。）是怎样写出来的？（是通过室内外环境描写表现出来的。）

教师告诉学生：这种不直接描述人物特点，而是通过环境来烘托的方法又叫侧面描写。

（2）桑娜家境非常贫穷。

桑娜的家境贫穷从哪些文字可以看出来？

根据学生回答，出示：

桑娜沉思：丈夫不顾惜身体，冒着寒冷和风暴出去打鱼，她自己也从早到晚地干活，还只能勉强填饱肚子。孩子们没有鞋穿，不论冬夏都光着脚跑来跑去；吃的是黑面包，菜只有鱼??

师边读边提问：

A．“沉思”是什么意思？桑娜家境贫寒是通过对桑娜的什么描写表现出来的？（心理。）

B．“勉强填饱肚子”是什么意思？

C．这“勉强度日”的生活是靠什么来维持的？

小结：这段文字以桑娜的心理描写的方式表现了桑娜家境贫穷，通过这段文字，我们可以得知，桑娜的家庭生活只能说是勉强度日，而这种勉强度日的生活也是靠桑娜和渔夫从早到晚不停地劳作才得以维持的。

［设计意图：引导学生读书发现作者在叙事的过程中通过环境描写写出了桑娜、渔夫的勤劳和他们家境的贫寒，有利于进一步感受人物的美好心灵。］

1．当桑娜在等待丈夫出海归来的夜晚，去看望西蒙，发现西蒙已死，她抱回西蒙的两个孩子。作者并不是平铺直叙地展示事件的发展过程，而是在叙事的过程中完成了对人物美好形象的塑造。请同学们仔细默读3—11自然段，看看作者主要采用了什么方法来刻画桑娜这一人物的？

2．请同学们再次默读3—11自然段，画出描写桑娜心理的句段，仔细读一读，想一想，你从中体会到了什么，也可以写一写，留下你思考的痕迹。

3．交流。

根据学生的交流，重点引导学生品读以下两处。

（1）根据学生回答，出示：

她的心跳得很厉害，自己也不知道为什么要这样做，但是觉得非这样做不可。

A．你从这句话中体会到了什么？

B．对这句话你有没有不明白的地方？

C．教师引导理解。

为什么说“自己也不知道为什么要这样做”？桑娜抱回孩子的那一刻她经过了深思熟虑吗？她考虑到自己这样做是舍己为人的善举吗？那么是什么驱使她这样做了？（善良的本性。）

“非这样做不可”什么意思？（应该而且必须这样做。）为什么在桑娜看来“非这样做不可”？

（2）根据学生回答，出示：

桑娜脸色苍白，神情激动。她忐忑不安地想：“他会说什么呢？这是闹着玩的吗？自己的五个孩子已经够他受的了??是他来啦？??不，还没来！??为什么把他们抱过来啊？??他会揍我的！那也活该，我自作自受??嗯，揍我一顿也好！”

A．让学生说一下对这段话的理解。

“他会说什么呢？这是闹着玩的吗？自己的五个孩子已经够他受的了”，桑娜为什么会想到这些？

“??是他来啦??不，还没来！??”说明了桑娜怎样的心情？

你从“嗯，揍我一顿也好！”这句话中体会到什么？从这里你认为桑娜是怎样的一个人？（桑娜是一个宁可自己受苦也要帮助别人的人。）

C．你对这段话还有什么不理解的地方？（引导学生探讨省略号的作用：心情紧张，心理活动时断时续，不是很连贯，很有条理。）

D．谁能有感情朗读一下这段话，注意读出桑娜忐忑不安的心理。

高二英语设计教案收藏12篇

每个老师在上课前会带上自己教案课件，就需要老师用心去设计好教案课件了。做好教案课件的前期准备工作，这样才能实现预期的教学目标设计。下面工作总结之家给大家分享高二英语设计教案，希望能对你有所帮助，请收藏！

高二英语设计教案 篇1

1、 听懂会说 We have a new friend today. I'm from America.

2、 掌握 I'm from...句型.

3、 认识美国 、加拿大、中国的国旗，并会介绍自己。

句型We have two new friends today. I'm from the UK.

1.复习第一册所学歌曲“Hello”。

T: Welcome back to school. Nice to see you again.

请一些学生做此对话练习，由教师和一名学生来做，过渡到由两名学生来做。

Hello，teacher.

Nice to see you, too.

1.师生问候：

T: Good morning, boys and girls.

T: I'm Miss…. I'm from China.(手中举起中国国旗) And you?

鼓励学生说出：I'm... I'm from China.

3.教师：Class, we have two new friends today. 让学生观看教学课件。

教师反复点击对话框中的句子，学生跟读模仿。

4.教师问： What's the girl's name?

Is she from China?

What does Amy say?

让学生模仿Amy说出：Hi! I'm Amy. I'm from the UK.

6.让学生表演课文对话，以小组为单位进行竞赛。

7.让学生戴上头饰分别扮演Amy,ZhangPeng和Mike上台做自我介绍。

Good morning, teacher.

I'm... I'm from...

Hi! I'm Amy. I'm from the UK.

Step3.

1.Pass the balloon.游戏规则：传球，谁拿到气球谁就要用英语进行自我介绍。如：游戏开始时，一人拿着气球说：I'm Tom. I'm from China.然后把气球随便传给另一个人，拿到气球的人要继续游戏。(注：在这个游戏中，可以把自己当成其他国家的人。)

2.在Let's talk 的基础上，自编对话并表演。

A:(指着B)I have a new friend.

B:(起立)Hi, I am... I am from...

C: (全班) Nice to meet you.

B：Nice to meet you, too.

3.让学生说一说他们所知道的我国省、市的名称都有哪些。让学生用I'm from....来表达出他们所喜欢的地方。等等。做完这一练习后，还可让学生找一找班内有没有老乡，如有都是谁。 学生玩游戏，并运用句型I'm... I'm from...

如：I'm from HaiNan./ShanDong...

2、向家长朋友做自我介绍，巩固会话内容。

高二英语设计教案 篇2

教学目标：

1、听懂、会说Hello./Hi,I'm...。

2、通过创设见面打招呼、自我介绍以及道别等情景，让学生学会见面打招呼、自我介绍及道别的日常用语

3、培养学生乐于开口,敢于开口讲英语的习惯，激发学生想学、乐学英语的兴趣和愿望。

教学重点：本部分主要是见面打招呼、自我介绍及道别用语的会话学习，使学生在不同的情景中听懂、会说Hello./Hi.I'm...。

教学难点：自我介绍用语I’m?的发音不容易到位，学习起来较难，教师要适时纠正，切不可挫伤孩子的学习积极性。

3、学生和教师各自收集一些印有外国文字的物品。

5、学生收集一些在现实生活中已经能用英语表述的物品或图片，如：VCD。

教师用“Hello.”问候学生。

辨认不同国家的文字，想一想，哪种文字应用最广泛。

教师在此基础上与学生讨论一下英语的作用以及学习英语的意义。

请学生说说他们在现实生活中已经了解的英语单词（边展示实物或图片边说）或日常用语。

2、呈现新课、操练(Presentation/Practice)

（1）教师播放本课的歌曲“Hello”的录音，自然引出师生之间的打招呼。

（2）教师利用这个机会及时向学生介绍自己Hello,I’m?/Hi,I’m?

（3）通过师生对话，鼓励学生介绍自己Hello,I’m?/Hi,I’m?

（4）介绍本套教材中的主要人物Sarah,ChenJie,Mike,WuYifan，请学生扮演这些人物到讲台前说Hello!I’m?

（5）通过教学素材来展示Let’stalk部分的教学内容.

（1）遇到老师、同学和家长时要用打招呼；分手时要用道别。

（2）制作人物面具。

1、进一步巩固打招呼、自我介绍及道别用语，能在不同情景中准确运用。

2、能够听说、认读crayon,pencil,eraser,ruler,并能用英语介绍文具。

3、进一步培养开口能力，初步了解一些课堂用语。

教学重点：有关文具的四个词汇crayon、pencil、eraser、ruler的学习，并用英语介绍文具。

教学难点：较准确读出各单词，尤其是crayon，eraser两个单词的发音。课前准备：学生的面具

教学过程：

（1）师生共唱英语歌曲“Hello”

（2）学生戴上自己喜欢的人物面具，表演见面打招呼或自我介绍用语。

2、呈现新课、操练(Presentation/Practice)

（1）教师事先安排一位学生扮演Zoom，并向学生介绍情景：今天是Zoom的生日，爸爸、妈妈为他买了个新书包作为生日礼物（拿出准备好的实物）。Zoom打开书包，一一拿出蜡笔、铅笔、钢笔、橡皮、尺子，边拿文具边说英文crayon,pencil,eraser,ruler。教师用双面胶将这些实物固定在黑板上。

（2）教师教新单词crayon,pencil,eraser,ruler。

（1）听说、认读新单词crayon,pencil,eraser,ruler，并能用英语介绍文具。

（2）做单词卡片。

教学反思：

教学目标：正确认读、书写26个大小写字母，会背字母表。

教学重点：相似字母的区分和变化较大的大写字母的记忆；

(1)复习Ihavea(an)?教师先发指令请全班共同练习，之后可请“小老师”带领同学们进行操练。

课堂导入：以问题开始，如小朋友们以前有没有听说过26个英文字母啊？有没有哪些朋友会读一些字母啊？

1、这节课我们来学习一首歌，首先，听老师先唱一遍（如果有会唱的同学可以跟老师一起唱）边唱边出示26个大小写字母的卡片。

2、接下来，老师一句一句地唱。讲字母分成三组，如A----G,H-----N,O---且只出示大写字母。

3、A----G组老师领唱完后，学生分组唱（班内可以按座位分成几小组）。

4、H-----N组老师领唱完后，学生可以分男女生交替唱（重复两遍）。

5、O------Z组老师领唱完后，师生合作唱。

6、老师请一位同学来带着大家唱，课件出示26个字母，包括大小写，可以点唱。

7、全体齐唱一遍，可以拍手唱。

8、给与表现好的同学奖励。。

1、开火车按字母表顺序认读。

2、课件单个出示大写字母，点名认读。

3、连线：将大小写字母连起来（回答问题时要求先大声念出大写字母，再和哪一个小写字母相连）。

出示小写字母，学生写出相应的大写字母。随后即出示对应的大写字母，请学生对照是否正确。

教学目标：

1、初步学习询问对方的姓名及回答的用语What'syourname?Mynameis...，使学生能听、会说此交际用语。

教学重点：询问对方的姓名及回答的用语What’syourname?Mynameis?的学习

教学难点：What’syourname?Mynameis?中name的发音.

教学过程：

(2)师生互相问候Hello!/Hi!

(3)学生戴着头饰或面具，分别起立做自我介绍。

2、呈现新课、操练(Presentation/Practice)

（1）老师指着自己的英文名卡说Hello!I’mMiss/Mr?.然后用Myname’s?.反复说三到四遍自己的名字，速度由慢到正常。接着教师对一名学生发问What’syourname（用清晰、缓慢的语调问两遍）边问边指他/她的名卡，并可以用夸张的口型提示他/她回答Myname’s?.教师对第一个应答学生应重点表扬，并发给他/他小奖品，以鼓励学生认真听别人的.问答，努力模仿教师说的新句型。跟读、模仿、操练Myname’s?.注意学生对name一词中a的发音。跟读、模仿What’syourname?

（4）教道别语Goodbye/Bye，告诉学生其中意思是“再见”或“一会见”。

(6)出示B部分Let’stalk的内容。

（1）Pairwork:让学生戴上头饰，表演书上Let’stalk的对话。

（3）Let’splay中的游戏。

鼓励学生用第4-7页所学的内容与同学和老师进行交流。

教学目标：

1、学习有关学校及学习用品的词汇bag,book,penpencil-box,通过听听做做的活动，让学生练习并运用所学的词汇。

2、了解一些简单的指示语，要求学生能听懂并按照指令做出相应的动作教学重点：pencil-box,book,pen,bag,4个有关学习用品的词汇学习。教学难点：本课词汇的认读。

教学过程：

（1）“接力活动”：学生一个接一个进行口语问答，要求又快又好。

（2）通过图片和单词卡片复习学过的单词crayon,ruler,eraser,pencil.

2、呈现新课、操练(Presentation/Practice)

(1)教学单词pencil-box,book,pen,bag,

（3）教师边做打开铅笔盒的动作边说Openyourpencilbox.用同样的方法教Showmeyourpen.Closeyourbook.Carryyourbag.等句子。

（4）让学生边说边做Let’sdo部分的活动。

（2）通过游戏Simonsays来练习以show,open,close,carry所引导的祈使句。

学生根据教师读单词，拿出所听到的文具。

（1）要求学生跟读单词和句子，并在实际生活中自然运用。

（2）将学习用品逐个用英语说给家人听，并制成单词卡片。

教学反思：

高二英语设计教案 篇3

Ⅰ.Brief Statements Based on the Unit

This unit provides the students good English language materials.Their interest in creating something useful will be aroused.In the first period,we’ll begin with how the students come to school.Then problems such as flat tyre will come up.In order to solve the problem,we’ll see a new type of bicycle and other new inventions.While talking about them,the students’ speaking ability will be improved.Listening is about two men,who want patents.After listening to it,the students will improve their listening ability.And students will practise how to express and support an opinion in the speaking part.In the second period,the text will be dealt with.The students’ interest of creation will be greatly aroused.Students will improve their reading ability as well as master the useful words and expressions.In the third period,some useful words and expressions will be mastered by the students after they finish the exercises.Also,the Attributive clause is reviewed in this period.In the last period,students will learn some useful words and expressions from the reading passage.And the students are asked to write an article describing a computer to improve their writing ability.After Ss study the whole unit,their abilities to listen,speak,read and write will be improved.

1.Talk about inventions.

2.Practise expressing and supporting an opinion.

3.Review the Attributive Clause.

4.Write a process essay.

Compare more files(Y/N)(还作文件比较吗？)

Directory entries adjusted(目录页已调整)

Error loading operating system(装入操作系统的错误)

Files are different sizes(文件大小不同)

FOR without NEXT(For语句中没有对应的next语句)

Incorrect DOS version(不正确的DOS版本)

Backup file sequence error(后备文件顺序错误)

Bad or missing command interpreter(非法的或缺少命令解释程序)

Cannot execute FORMAT(不能执行FORMAT)

Cannot find system files(找不到系统文件)

Where is television going from here?Television,the box itself and what it does,is changing greatly.While nobody is really sure what it’s going to look like,TV and the Internet are coming silently together.In the old days of broadcasting,people used to say that the real miracle(奇迹)of television was turning air into money.The television miracle of the future is interactive(相互影响的).

“The Internet is the most significant change in creating what becomes the next mass media that I think any of us will experience in our lifetime,”says Tom Frank,a network expert.Using unused lines in the TV spectrum(范围),broadcasters are learning how to put brand-new interactivity into TV programs.There will be a little instrument that will indicate that interactivity is present and possible.Then,just will a standard remote control like this you would be able to press one button and say,start that interactivity.A menu would appear,similar to the one on a web site,that would let you interact with the program as it was being broadcast.If you are watching a cooking show,for example,you can print the recipe(烹饪法)or even pause the show and buy the ingredients.Many web sites do exist now where you can actually get your food shopping done for yourself and delivered to your house.So you can order the very ingredients for the dish you are watching the chef make on TV.And it will bring the right quantity of things directly to your house.

You could also interact with TV commercials.While you’re watching a commercial,you have the choice to buy the clothes the actors are wearing.Of course,the more you interact with this new sort of TV,the more you leave a digital record,and the more advertisers learn about your shopping habits.In fact,TV ads might be targeted at this special group of people who share a common interest.In the future,almost anything might be possible.Even news programs like World News Tonight could be improved.You could have the choice of changing camera angles.If you wanted,you could pause what a reporter is saying and go back to World News Tonight to watch the next story,or skip to the last story in the show,or perhaps go deeper into a topic and view an interview prepared for Nightline later on.In the near future,you’re expected to see television develop to become more like the Internet,meaning more choice,the ability to do the sorts of things you want to do at the moment you wish to do them.

Teaching Aims:

1.Improve the students’ listening ability.

2.Talk about some topics about inventions and practise supporting an opinion.

3.Learn and master some useful words and expressions.

Teaching Important Point:

Train the students’ listening and speaking abilities by talking about and listening to some materials.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.How to help students to improve their listening ability.

2.How to help the students to learn to express and support an opinion.

Teaching Methods:

1.Discussion to make students talk about inventions.

2.Individual or pair work to make students practise their speaking ability.

3.Listening practice to improve the students’ listening ability.

Teaching Aids:

Teaching Procedures:

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ Warming-up and Discussion

T:(Walk to one student.)How do you come to school every day,Wang Jing?

S:I come to school on foot every day.My home is quite near.It only takes me about ten minutes.

T:That’s quite convenient.You’re lucky.And,Li Fang,how about you?

S:I come to school by bike.It takes me about 15 minutes to get to our school.

T:You must be careful on your way to and from school.There must be many people on the road.Do you think it convenient?

S:Most of the time it is,but sometimes my bike has a flat tyre.I have to get it repaired and therefore I’ll be late for school.Once I even lost my bike.When I went to get it,it was gone.I had to take a taxi to go home and buy another bike.

T:I’m sorry to hear that.But suppose a new type of bike has been invented,what do you want it to be like?

S:I think the new type of bike can be folded up and carried about so that it will not be stolen.

T:Good idea.But this is not very convenient.It’s not easy for you to carry a bike around,is it?

S:No,it isn’t.What should it look like then?Please tell us.

T:OK.Let’s watch the short video.

(Play the video for explaining how an inflatable bicycle works.)

T:That’s the new type of bike.It’s a kind of inflatable bicycle.Who can tell us the advantages of it?

S:Let me have a try.We’ll not have to worry about having our bikes stolen again.Because we can let the air out and put the bike in bag.It’s very convenient to be carried around since it is not heavy.

T:Very good.I think I’ll buy one when it is on sale.We know that inventions can make our life easier and we’ll talk about some inventions.

(Stick the pictures of electric shoes,inflatable bicycle,edible chopsticks and nose-top computer on the blackboard and then mark one,two,three and four.)

T:Look at these pictures,please.Do you know what they are?Li Jie,will you have a try?

S:I think the second invention is the inflatable bike that we’ve just talked about.In the third picture,the man is eating the chopsticks after his meal.I guess these chopsticks are edible ones.I’m not sure about the others.

T:Good.You’re right.The second one is the inflatable bicycle.(Bb:inflatable bicycle)and the third are edible chopsticks.(Bb:edible chopsticks)They’re delicious and environmentally friendly. We can save some trees and have a snack at the same time.They come in five different flavours. You will never need to wash chopsticks again.Isn’t this wonderful?

S:Yes,it’s great.But,Miss Guo,maybe we could invent edible plates,bowls,cups and so on.

T:Oh,you’re great!I’m sure you have got a wonderful idea.Maybe one day you can invent such things.Study hard and you’ll be an inventor in the future.Now,let’s look at the first picture.Who knows what it is?

S:I think it is a special kind of shoe which can make electricity.If we wear such shoes,we can see the road in dark places.We needn’t take a flashlight with us any more.

S:I don’t quite agree with you.Maybe this shoe can make you feel warm using the electricity it makes.

T:You both are very clever.This is called the electric shoe.(Bb:electric shoe)The heel of this shoe is a machine that makes electricity with every step you take.You will never need batteries again.But maybe you have better ideas about how to make use of the electricity it makes.If you like,you could have a try to make your own invention in your spare time.Now,let’s look at the fourth picture.Does anybody have an idea?

S:It looks like a computer which is fixed onto the man’s nose.And the keyboard is on his vest.I can’t believe it.

T:Yes,you’re quite right.This is called the nose-top computer.(Bb:nose-top computer)This new nose-top computer weighs less than a pair of glasses.It fits comfortably on your nose.When you want to type something you can use the keyboard vest.You will never have to carry a heavy laptop computer.These inventions are all wonderful.But which of them do you think would be useful?Please have a discussion in groups of four and tell us why you think so.

(Ss have their discussions in groups of four for about five minutes.Teacher may ask one group to act out their discussion or report their results.)

Sample dialogue:

A:I think the inflatable bicycle would be useful.Because it’s convenient to carry and we needn’t worry about having our bikes stolen.

B:That’s quite true,but I think the edible chopsticks are useful.Because it not only saves trees but also saves water.It is very important to save our natural resources and protect our earth.

C:You’re quite right,but I have a different opinion.I think the nose-top computer is useful.Because the computer is used more and more widely.It’s convenient to carry such a computer around when doing business.

…

Step Ⅲ Preparation for Listening

T:We know that when someone has invented something,usually he will go to a patent officer to apply for a patent.Now,let’s listen to two dialogues.In these two dialogues,Mr Dean and Mr Scoles both have invented something.They’re trying to get the patent for their inventions from the patent officer.Before we listen to the tape,go through the questions on Page 15 by yourselves,and see what we should do after listening.

T:(A few minutes later.)Are you ready?

T:OK.Listen carefully and answer the questions first on your own and then check your answers with your partner.

(Play the tape twice for students to listen to and then answer the questions.Play it a third time for students to check their answers.Allow the students a few minutes to check their answers in pairs.At last,check the answers with the whole class.)

T:Well done.Now,you’ve known how to apply for a patent.Let’s play a game.Each of you will be given a role in groups of five:four inventors and one patent officer.Each inventor should explain how the invention works and why it is useful.The patent officers should ask questions and decide if each invention is a good idea or not.And I’ll show you some useful expressions to help you.

(Hand out the role cards and show the useful expressions on the multimedia.)

Useful Expressions:

This invention can help people…

What does it look like?

What’s it made of?

This is a new way of…

How does it work?

How would people use it?

This new invention will make it possible for people to…

(Students work in groups of five and have a discussion for about five minutes.Then the teacher may ask some groups to act out their discussion.)

Sample dialogue:

(A-Inventor A;B-Inventor B;C-Inventor C;D-Inventor D;P-Patent officer)

P:Now,please explain how your inventions work and why they are useful.Your invention is a car that uses water instead of petrol,isn’t it?

P:What does it look like?

A:It looks like an ordinary car.Here’s the picture.Please have a look.

P:Oh,it looks beautiful.What’s it made of?

A:It’s made of a new kind of alloy,which is much lighter.

A:A little bit.But it can save much more energy,so lots of money is saved.Besides,there is something even more important.It is good for our environment.It doesn’t pollute the air.

P:Sounds great.Thank you.And what’s your invention,sir?

B:My invention is a flying bicycle.

P:A flying bicycle?How would people use it?

B:People can ride it on the road and when there are too many bicycles,people can fly it.Just push one button on the handle,the bicycle will fly.

B:It works like a small plane.It has a special engine.

P:This is a new way to improve our traffic condition.Thank you.(To C)Would you please explain your new invention to me?

C:My invention is a machine that makes it possible for people to know the future.

P:How would people use it?

C:People just input their date of birth,hobbies,dislikes and anything about themselves,and then press the button,wait for a moment,and they will see the result on the screen.

P:That’s interesting.Thank you.(To D)What’s your invention,please?

D:It’s a pen that can automatically translate what you write into a foreign language.

P:Good.It can help people communicate freely with foreign friends.People needn’t study foreign languages hard any more.But,maybe it will make it more difficult for people to communicate orally.They will have to write down what they want to say.This is not convenient. For the flying bicycle,what if there was something wrong with it when it was flying in the air?I think it would be rather dangerous for the people walking on the ground.Maybe the bike would fall onto them and cause an accident.Of course the rider would be in danger,too.For the machine that makes people know the future,I don’t think it’s a good idea for us to know our future too early.I think the most useful invention is the car that uses water instead of petrol.So I will give the inventor of this new car a patent.

T:Today we’ve learnt how to express and support an opinion.And we’ve learnt how to apply for a patent when you have made an invention.Many of you have wonderful ideas about new inventions.Study hard now and I believe you’ll make your own inventions in the future.In the next period,we’ll read about how to be creative and how to be an inventor.It’ll be very useful for you.Preview the reading part carefully after class,please.OK.That’s all for today.See you tomorrow!

Step Ⅶ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

electric shoe inflatable bicycle

edible chopsticks nose-top computer

Ⅰ Teaching Aims:

Learn and master some new and important language points;

Improve the Ss’ reading ability by reading and comprehending the text;

Get the Ss to learn how to be creative.

Ⅱ Teaching Focuses:

The main idea of the text.

Finish all the reading comprehension exercises.

The four thinking strategies.

Ⅲ Teaching Methods:

Question-and-answer activity. Some games.

Group work, pair work or individual work to make every student work in class.

Ⅳ Teaching Aids:

1．A multi-media computer 2．A tape recorder and a tape.

Ⅴ Teaching Procedures:

Show a picture of a bulb to the students. Ask: Who invented it?

Then show the portrait of Edison to the students. Ask: Do you know anything about his childhood? If they don’t, tell them sth. about his schooling, and then say: People are not born creative, and you don’t have to be very intelligent to be an inventor. We can learn to be creative. Today we’ll learn how to be creative.

Scan the title and the four sub-titles, and guess what’s the text about?

A. how to become a great thinker

1.What’s creative thinking?

It is one of skills and habits.

2.How do people come up with ideas for new inventions? In how many ways?

By good thinking strategies.

T: well, now let’s read the text carefully by listening to and reading after the tape one paragragh after another. You are required to finish off all the comprehension tasks for each part.

Part 2: What is to “think outside the box”?

To think outside the box is to try new ways to solve a problem.

To rephrase a problem to allow for creative solutions and also try “impossible” or “crazy”solutions.

To make a conscious effort to break away from old thought patterns.

Game 1: How do you connect all the dots with only four straight lines?

Game 2:

Mike’s father is a policeman. Why did Mike recognize him among his workmates though they were all in uniform?

Who never goes to see a doctor,even when he is ill ?

It is leaking( 漏水 ) everywhere in the office on a rainy day, why nobody has got wet?

The plane crashed, but there were nobody injured. Why?

Why a river richer than a bank?

to look at a problem in as many way as possible

Each new way of looking at a situation improves our understanding and makes it easier to discover new possibilities.

Game 3:

Can you only see a pot? Pay attention to the dark!

Two faces!

try to combine new and old ideas in as many different ways as possible

try to make connections that may seem strange at first

think of new applications and solutions

develop new ideas even when they were tired or did not feel inspired

For each new invention that works, there are at least ten that do not.

1. Match the examples with the right titles:

Example 1: think outside the box.

Example 4: take another look at it.

2. T or F exercises.

1) Most inventors have high IQs.

2) The things we know can sometimes make it more difficult for us to understand.

3) It’s impossible to learn how to be creative.

4) The best way to find a good solution is to look for one good answer.

5) Inventors try to avoid failure.

6) The more ways we have of looking at a problem, the more likely it is that we can find a solution.

7) Most good ideas are the result of a long process of trial and error.

3.Reading comprehension.

1) We can get the conclusion from the fifth paragraph that ____ A. to be clever can lead to success B. he who laughs last laughs best

C. failure is the mother of success D. never too old to learn

2). The sentence “ good ideas are no accident” means the following except that ____

A. Good ideas never come by chance. B. The accident is not caused by good ideas.

C. To be successful needs many trials and errors.

D. Failures can also help us move towards a better solution.

3). Another proper title for the text is probably ____

A.Creativity B.Great thinkers C. How to solve problems D. Connection

Step 6 Discussion (Groupwork):

1. How do you understand the title of the passage?

If we want to be creative, we should follow these rules---think outside the box, take another look at it, make connections and keep trying. These rules also work when we solve a problem .

2. What other rules should you have if we want to be creative?

3. Of all the rules discussed above, which one do you think is the most important? Why?

P 61 Exx 1 & 2.P 131 Exx 1, 2&3.

Teaching Aims:

1.Review the useful expressions learnt in this unit.

2.Learn the derivatives of some words.

3.Review the Attributive Clause.

Teaching Important Points:

1.The useful expressions learnt in this unit.

2.Review the Attributive Clause.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to help students master the Attributive Clause.

Teaching Methods:

1.Review method to consolidate the useful expressions learnt in the last two periods.

2.Practise to help students master the derivatives of some words.

3.Different kinds of practice to help students master the Attributive Clause.

4.Pair work and individual work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

Teaching Procedures:

Greet the whole class as usual.

T:Today we’ll play a game first.(Stick some pictures of famous people on the blackboard.Cf:The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard.)Look at the blackboard,please.These are pictures of some famous people.Do you know them?Maybe you’re familiar with some of them,but maybe others are strange to you.Don’t worry.I’ll give you some cards.There’s one sentence on each card.The sentence describes a famous person.Guess the name of the person first and then match the card with the picture.Do you understand?

(Teacher hands out some cards on which are the sentences in Word puzzle.)

T:Now,please have a short discussion to find out who the person is and then match the card with the picture.When you find out the answer,please come to the blackboard,stick the card and write the name below the picture.

(Students prepare for a moment and then they begin to match the cards with the pictures.)

T:Have they matched the cards with the pictures correctly and got the correct names?

(If there’re any mistakes,teacher may ask some students to correct them.)

T:OK.Now,fill in the word puzzle using the names of the people that you’ve just found out.

(Stick on the blackboard a piece of paper with the word puzzle on it.)

(A moment later,ask several students to write down their answers.Cf:The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard.)

T:Do you agree with them?

Ss:Yes,they’re quite right.

T:Good.These people are all famous people.Look at the sentences on the cards.What do you find?

S:I find that there is an Attributive Clause in each sentence,restrictive or non-restrictive.

T:Yes,you’re a careful girl.This game is also for you to review the Attributive Clause.Read these sentences again and find out the Attributive Clause in each sentence.

(A moment later,ask some students to say their answers.)

1.…,whose name is always linked with his cartoon characters,such as Mickey Mouse and Donald Duck.

2.…,who was born in Germany but spent his last years in the USA.

3.…,among whose big inventions are electric lighting and the motion picture camera.

4.…,whose many great films were City Lights and Modern Times.

5.…,who died in a plane crash in .

6.…,whose famous songs include Blowing In The Wind.

7.…,who discovered the Law of Gravity.

Down:

1.…,who lived in China before the Liberation.

2.…,who fought for the freedom of slaves in the USA.

3.…,who was Adam’s wife.

4.…,whose ideas about the future have often become reality,…

5.…,who later bravely fought against the British invasion and saved her country and people.

T:We’ve learnt a lot about the Attributive Clause before.We know that it is a very important grammar item,so let’s do some more exercises to consolidate it.Turn to Page 61,and finish Exercise 2 in Grammar part.

(Allow the students a few minutes to finish it and then check the answers.)

Suggested answers:

1.The wires with which the machines were connected were very old.

2.Leonardo da Vinci,who was interested in both literature and science,painted the famous“Smiling Mona Lisa”.

3.The pilot with whom we had dinner told us stories about his travels.

4.The four ancient Chinese inventions,which we are proud of,have remained important in human history for thousands of years.

5.Mozart,whose music is well liked by people all over the world,showed his talent in music at a very young age.

6.The photos are kept in that cupboard in which/where we found our parents’ old photos.

7.The country from which this news report is coming is on the other side of the world.

8.One of the first inventions of human beings was the wheel,which we don’t know who first invented.

T:In this unit,we have learnt a lot about new inventions and famous inventors.Now,let’s do an exercise using what we’ve learnt in this unit to review the Attributive Clause.Turn to Page 61 and finish Exercise 1 in Grammar part,please.Finish them first by yourselves and then you may discuss your answers in pairs.

(A few minutes later,ask some students to read out their answers.Students may have various answers.)

Suggested answers:

1.…can be used at home or in an office.

2.…it is not convenient to use a desktop computer.

3.…businesses are busy.

4.…you can obtain a patent for your invention.

5.…we need something more useful or more convenient to satisfy the needs of people.

6.…invents things.

7.…are both delicious and environmentally friendly./can be eaten.

T:As you know,there are a lot of useful expressions in this unit.Let’s do some exercises to review them.

(Show the following on the multimedia and allow the students a couple of minutes to finish it.)

Fill in the blanks with correct prepositions.

1.I’m tired__________washing clothes by hand.I’ll buy a washing machine tomorrow.

2.You’ve got to break away__________old thought patterns in order to develop creative thinking.

3.She was telling us about her sick mother when she suddenly broke__________tears.

4.The students like physics classes because the way their teacher teaches allows__________creativity.

5.I don’t want to keep the hen any more;I’ll exchange it__________twenty eggs.

6.During a test,it’s always wise to move on when you get stuck__________a difficult problem and come back to it later.

(A moment later,ask some students to say their answers and then check them with the whole class.Give some explanations when necessary.)

Suggested answers:

3.into(break into tears/a house)

T:Well done!After class you should read these sentences more to master the use of the phrases in them.Now,let’s do another practice.

(Show the following on the multimedia.)

Change the form of the following words.

Suggested answers:

T:Today we’ve reviewed some useful expressions and words we learnt before.Also we’ve done some practice to review the Attributive Clause.After class,you should do more practice to master them better.Besides,try to solve the riddles in Part 14 on Page 62.That’s all for today.See you tomorrow!

Step Ⅴ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Word puzzle:

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn a reading passage to improve the students’ reading ability.

2.Do some writing practice to improve the students’ writing ability.

3.Learn some useful words and expressions.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Improve the students’ integrating skills.

2.Review the Attributive Clause.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to improve the students’ integrating skills.

Teaching Methods:

1.Reading and understanding to improve the students’ reading ability.

2.Writing practice to improve the students’ writing ability.

3.Individual or pair work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

Teaching Procedures:

Greet the whole class as usual.

T:How many of you have a computer at home?Please put up your hands.

(Some students put up their hands.)

Good.Most of you have a computer.What do you do with your computer?

S:I search for information on the Internet.And sometimes I play games with it.

T:Does anybody do anything else with it?

S:I sometimes draw pictures or type something.

S:For me,I sometimes send e-mails to my friends.

S:I listen to the music.

S:I watch football matches.

…

T:Do you think the computer is really useful to you?

S:Not exactly.I can also do these things without a computer.I can go to a library to look for the information that I need.But it’s much quicker and more convenient if I use a computer.

S:I can listen to the music on a tape recorder.

S:I can watch football matches on TV.

…

T:You’re quite right.New technology is often used in old ways.Now,please have a discussion in groups of four to complete the chart shown on the screen.

(Show the following on the screen and give the students a moment to have a discussion.)

--------

--------

--------

--------

------ --------

--------

--------

(After a few minutes,ask several students to say their answers.Students may have various answers.)

Suggested answers:

Computer Used as:

The Internet Used as:

T:Well done!Now,let’s read the passage about new technology carefully.Try to find out the answers to the two questions on the screen.After you finish,you may have a discussion in pairs.

(The following questions are shown on the screen.)

1.Why are scientific metaphors like “memory”and“cut and paste” useful?How may they limit our thinking?

2.Think of more words we use to talk about computers and Internet.How well do they describe the things or actions they are used for?Are there other words we could use that might be better?

(A moment later,check the answers with the whole class.Students may have various answers to the second question.)

Suggested answers:

1.They make it easier for us to understand and use a new tool.They may make it more difficult for us to use the new invention in the best way.

2.Words like:copy,file,delete,lock,enter,return,store

T:Now,I think you’ve understood the passage well.Please look at the screen.I’ll explain some expressions that you must master.Please listen carefully.

(The multimedia shows the following.)

Language Points:

1.sb. be said to be…

e.g.He is said to be a good basketball player when he was young.

e.g.His new bike is similar to mine.

e.g.Our life is different from what it was ten years ago.

e.g.Now that you’ve grown up,you must stop this childish behaviour.

(Explain the notes to students and write the following on the blackboard:sb. be said to be;A be similar to B;be different from;now that.)

Step Ⅳ Listening and Reading Aloud

T:Now,let’s listen to the tape carefully.You can read after it when I play it the second time.Pay more attention to your stress.Are you ready?

(Play the tape twice for students to listen and repeat.After listening to the tape,students are allowed to read the passage aloud for a while.At last,ask some of them to read the text.One student,one paragraph.)

T:Just now,we’ve talked about computers.Most of you have a desktop computer at home.(Stick a picture of a desktop computer on the blackboard.)And as you can see,I’m using a laptop computer.(Stick a picture of laptop computer on the blackboard.)These are the most popular computers that we can find.But have you heard that a new type of computer-the palmtop computer,has been invented?

T:It doesn’t matter.(Stick a picture of a palmtop computer on the blackboard.)Look at the picture.This is a palmtop computer.We know from the picture that a palmtop computer is a kind of computer that we can put on our palm.It’s very small,light and convenient to carry about.Do you like it?

Ss:Yes,I wish I could have one.

T:Certainly you’ll have one someday in the future.From these three pictures we know that computers are getting smaller and smaller.They’re becoming more and more convenient to be carried about.Can you guess what the first computer was like?

S:I guess it must have been a very big one.

T:You’re quite right.(Stick the picture of the Eniac on the blackboard.)Look,this is the first computer.It is as big as a house.Maybe you can’t imagine how big it is.But it doesn’t matter.What we need to know is that computers are becoming smaller and smaller,lighter and lighter.What do you think they will look like in the future and how we will use them?Who’d like to tell us your opinion?

S:Let me try.I think computers may look like a watch or a cellphone in the future.They will become even smaller.We can use them to watch TV,read books,search for information,chat with our friends,check the date and the time,and send information to others.

T:Very good.Now,imagine that you had to describe a computer to someone who lived in the 19th century.How would you explain it?What would you compare it to?You may have a short discussion in groups of three and then write a short description.

(Allow the students a few minutes to discuss and write their compositions.If time limits,allow the students to finish their writing after class.)

Sample description:

Have you seen a computer?Let me tell you something about it.A computer is an electric calculating machine that can store and recall information and make calculations at very high speed.It is a wonderful machine and can do most of the things people can do,but it can work millions of times faster.The first large,modern computer was built in 1946,and people needed a large house to put it in.In the last few years there have been great changes in they can be used in many fields.People even use it to pay their bills or order what they want.It is said that in the future computers would arrange everything for people,and do almost all kinds of work.That would be a real computer society!

T:Today we’ve read a passage about the scientific metaphors.We’ve talked more about new technology too.In this unit we also learnt how to become more creative by practising good thinking strategies.They can be used to study English,too.Read the tips on Page 64 carefully and try the ideas in future.They’re helpful for your study of English.Besides,we’ve reviewed the Attributive Clause.After class,you should do more practice by yourselves to master it better.Finally,have a discussion with your partner to find the answers to the two questions in Checkpoint 18 on Page 64.I’ll check your answers tomorrow.OK.That’s all for today.

…

Suggested answers:

1.Rephrase,impossible,crazy,break away from,explore,combine,trial,…

nvenient,environmentally,friendly,automatically,…

Step Ⅶ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Language Points:

sb. be said to be…

Computers:

Teaching Aims:

1.Revise the Attributive Clause,including the Restrictive Attributive Clause and the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.

2.Revise the use of relative pronouns and relative adverbs.

3.Expand the knowledge of the Attributive Clause.

Teaching Important Point:

The usage of the relative pronouns and adverbs.

Teaching Difficult Point:

Help the students to master the way of choosing a relative pronoun or a relative adverb correctly.

Teaching Methods:

review,explanation,inductive methods

Teaching Aids:

Teaching Procedures:

Greet the whole class as usual.

(Teacher checks the homework exercises first and then shows the following on the screen.)

1.He is a famous scientist.

2.Who’s that girl in red?

3.I’ve read all the books that you lent me.

4.I have lost my pen,which I like very much.

T:That’s all for the homework.Now please look at the sentences on the screen.Pay special attention to the underlined parts.Is there anything in common between them?

Ss:Yes.They all identify the nouns,which are used with them.Each part tells us which thing or person the speaker is talking about.

T:That is to say,the function of each underlined part is the same.Each of them is used as an attribute to describe each noun.Well,are there any differences between them?

S1:Yes.In the first sentence,the attribute is an adjective and put before the noun;the second is a prepositional phrase put after the noun;the third and fourth sentences are full sentences put after the nouns.

T:You are right,what do we call the sentences put after the noun?

Ss:The Attributive Clause.

T:Quite right.In a complex sentence,the clause modifying a noun or a pronoun in the main clause is called an Attributive Clause.The noun or pronoun is called Antecedent.The word that/which introduces the clause(between the noun/pronoun and the clause)is called Relative Pronoun or Relative Adverb.The relative pronouns or adverbs do two jobs at once.They can be used as subjects,objects,attributes or adverbials in the clause;at the same time,they join clauses together.About the use of them,we’ll have particular revision after a while.Now look at the sentences on the screen.

(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)

Complete the sentences with suitable relatives.

1.I know the reason__________he came late.

2.Do you know the woman,__________son went to college last year?

3.The house__________colour is red is John’s.

4.This is the best film__________I’ve ever seen.

5.That is the town__________he worked in 1987.

T:Who’d like to tell me what should be filled in the first sentence?

S2:I think“why”should be filled.Because the antecedent is“the reason”and the relative is used as the adverbial of reason in the Attributive Clause.

T:Yes.How about the second sentence?

(Teacher goes to another student and asks her/him to answer.)

S3:I fill“whose”here.Because the antecedent is “the woman”and the relative is used as the attribute in the Attributive Clause.

T:Right.Sit down,please.Now let’s look at the third sentence.

Suggested answers:

Step Ⅲ Summarizethe Use of the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause

T:The Non-restrictive Attributive Clause is a clause which gives extra information to the antecedent.So we use a comma to interrupt the sentence.When the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause is cut off,the sentence still has a full meaning.Now look at the sentences on the screen.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.I have two brothers,who are both soldiers.

2.Next week,which you’ll spend in your hometown,is coming.

3.I’ve tried two pairs of shoes,neither of which fits me well.

T:Pay attention to the underlined parts.There are commas to interrupt the sentences and “that”can not be used in the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.You should pay more attention to the structure“Indefinite Pronoun/Numbers/Noun/Superlative+of which/whom”is often used in the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.

Step Ⅳ The Usage of the Relative Pronouns and the Relative Adverbs

T:As we know,relative pronouns or adverbs paly important parts in the Attributive Clause.Now let’s make a list of them on the blackboard first and then revise their usage with the help of the forms on the screen.

(Bb:the relative pronouns:who,whom,that,whose,which;the relative adverbs: when, where, why)

(Teacher collects them first and then shows the following.)

Form 1:

the relative pronouns referring to function in the clause

that people/thing subject/object

whose people/thing(of whom/which) attribute

Form 2:

the relative adverb referring to function in the clause

when(=at/in/on which) time adverbial of time

where(=in/at which) place adverbial of place

why(=for which) reason adverbial of reason

(Teacher explains the two forms separately and adds the following with examples on the screen.)

T:1.When a relative pronoun is used as a subject in the clause,the verb must agree with the antecedent in person and number.

e.g.1.Those who want to go to the cinema must be at the school gate by 3:30 p.m.

He who doesn’t reach the Great wall is not a true man.

2.When the antecedent is the structure of “one of +n.(pl.)”,the verb in the clause must be plural,agrees with the plural form.However,if there is “the”or“only”before“one”,the verb in the clause must be singular,agrees with the word“one”.

e.g.2.She is the only one of the girls who has been to Beijing.

He is one of the boys who have seen the film.

3.When the antecedent is a noun for time or place “when”or“where”is not always used to introduce the clause.It depends on the function of the relative word in the clause.

e.g.3.The time when/that I went to Tokyo is in 1982.

I’ll never forget the time which/that I spent at college.

The shop which I bought is big.

The shop where/in which I bought the book is big.

Step Ⅴ The Difference Between “that”and “which”

T:As we know,both“that”and “which”can be used for things,but,the use of them are not always the same.Let’s look at the sentences on the screen.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.This is the second article that I have written in English.

2.It is the best film that he has ever seen.

3.This is the very book that I want to read.

4. All that they told me surprised me.

5.They talked about the teachers and schools that they had visited.

6. Who is the comrade that was there?

7.There is a bed in the room that is still vacant.

8.Our village is no longer the place that it used to be.

T:From the sentences on the screen,we can make a summary of the use of“that” and “which”.Look at the screen again.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.In following cases,“that”is often used.

(1)After ordinal number and superlatives.

(2)After the following words:all, only, little, few, much, very, none, last, just, any(thing), every(thing), some(thing),no(thing).

(3)After two or more antecedents,referring to both people and things.

(4)After interrogative pronouns“which”or “who”.

(5)When the relative pronoun is used as a predictive in the clause.

(6)When the main clause begins with “There be”.

2.In following cases,“which”is always used.

(1)After prepositions.

(2)To introduce a Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.

(3)The whole main sentence is the “antecedant”of the relative clause,and there is always a comma.

T:Now let’s do some exercises.Look at the screen.Fill in the blanks,choosing proper relative pronouns or relative adverbs.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.Tell me the reason for__________you were late for class.

2.Who is the girl__________is speaking there?

3.This is Mr Smith,__________has some thing interesting to tell you.

4.The computer__________CPU doesn’t work has to be repaired.

5.This kind of computer,__________is well-known,is out of date.

6.This is just the place__________I’ve been longing to visit for years.

7.His mother is an engineer,__________makes him very proud.

8.The old man has four sons,three of__________are doctors.

Suggested answers:

T:Now.Let’s have a test.Look at the screen.Do this exercise by yourself.A few minutes later.I’ll give you the answers.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.I don’t like the way__________he talked to his mother.

2.In the dark street,there wasn’t a single person__________she could turn for help.

3.The weather turned out to be very good,__________was more than we could expected.

4.All__________is needed is a supply of oil.

5.He paid the boy for washing the windows,most of__________hasn’t been cleaned at least a year.

6.She spoke about the books and writers__________she remembered.

7.The clever boy made a hole in the wall,__________he could see what was going on inside the house.

Suggested answers:

Step Ⅸ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Ⅰ.The differences between the Restrictive Attributive Clause and the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause

Ⅱ.The use of the relative words:

1.relative pronouns:who,whom,whose,that,which

Ⅲ.The differences between“that”and “which”

高二英语设计教案 篇4

编写时间: August 29, 执行时间：September 2,2005

第 1 课时 课型 Speaking and listening

教学目的与要求：

Enable the students to talk about science and scientists. Help them learn to describe people and practice debating

重点：Learn the patterns used to describe people and debating

难点 ：How to describe people and how to debate

Show the photos of some great people on the PowerPoint . Ask the students whether they know who they are and what they are famous for.

Then show the quotes on the Powerpoint and ask them to match them with the photos.

Get the students to know what to do in the listening test: Judge the who the scientists described on the tape .

1. Show the five brances Biology, Maths, Chemistry, Physics and computer science.

2. Show the useful expressions on the power point

3. Ask the students to say something about the famous scientists.

Record after teaching :

Try to think out more methods to help the students finish the task of speaking.

编写时间: Sept. 1,2005 执行时间：Sept. 3, 2005

教学目的与要求：

Learn the story of Stephen Hawing and encourage students to become strong-ninded. From his story students should learn to solve problems with scientific methods

重点：Learn about how Stephen got rid of his difficulties and became successful

难点： How to analyze the text and grasp the main idea of the text

Check the students homework and ask the students to say sth about Stephew Hawking.

Ask the students to understand the title of the passage.

1. Scanning: Ask the students to scan the text and find the information about his misfortune, his attitude towards difficulty, results from his disease and his achievenments.

2. Skimming Ask the students to skim the text and finish the post reading

3. Comprehensive exercises : Finish the Exx in the Best Design

4. Complementory Exercises : the Exx in the Best Design

,编写时间: Sept. 2,2005 执行时间：Sept. 4，5, 2005

教学目的与要求：

Students are asked to find the language points in the text.

重点：within, be curious about, debate, work on, dream of, seek after, observe,be satisfied with, the other way around… 难点:the usage of the infinitive 教具： a computer

教学程序：

Step 1Revision Check the students’ homework

Step 3 learn the language points

Learn the usage of the words and expressions in the text and ask the students to do some exercises .

Ask the students to finish the exercises and check the answers

编写时间: Sept. 2,2005 执行时间：Sept. 6 ,2005

教学目的与要求：

Students are asked to talk about their dreams using infinitives.

重点： Infinitives have adv. and adjective functions as well as noun functions

难点：Verbs that take infinitives but not gerund

教学程序：

Step 1Revision Check the students’ homework

Recall the usage of the infinitive and ask the students to finish the exercise in part 1

Ask the students to finish the exercises and check the answers

Record after teaching : Pay more attention to the perfect and the passive infinitive form, esp. the active expressing the passive form

编写时间: Sept. 2,2005 执行时间：Sept. 7, 2005

教学目的与要求：

Students are asked to talk about their dreams using the expressions they have learned.

重点：know something about the scientists and say sth about them. 难点：learn sth in the text and write a composition.

教学程序：

Step 1Revision Check the students’ homework

Step 3 Ask the students to write a composition using the expression Step 4 Practice

Ask the students to finish the composition and check it.

Record after teaching : Pay more attention to writing . Before writing , discussion is necessary . After writing , checking before the class is more important.

编写时间: Sept. 5,2005 执行时间：Sept. 8,2005

教学目的与要求：

Students are asked to do some exercises about what they have learned.

重点：review something about the text. 难点：review something in the text .

选择正确的词或词组，并用它们的正确形式填空。

punish, branch, be engaged to, predict, turn out to be, make a difference, doubt, use up, be satisfied with, go on with

1. KFC has lots of ________ in China.

2. No one can ________ what will happen in the future.

3. You will be ________ if you break the law.

4. They ________ their work after a rest.

5. This man appeared to be very kind, but he ________ a murderer in the end.

6. What will happen if we human beings ________ all the natural resources?

7. If everyone plants a tree, we can ________.

8. There is no ________ that Yang Liwei is a hero in China now.

9. He got the first place in the exam and his parents___ very___ his performance in the exam.

10. Tom ________ a pretty girl and they are going to get married soon.

KEY:

1. branches 2. predict 3. punished 4. went on with

5. turned out to be 6. use up 7. make a difference

8. doubt 9. were, satisfied with 10. is engaged to

高二英语设计教案 篇5

ic:

Talk about science and scientists

2. Function: describing people and debating

That’s correct. It’s clear that…

I doubt that …

There is no doubt that…

It’s hard to say.

Well, maybe, but…

That’s true.

What’s your idea?

Have you thought about…?

undertake analysis within gravity similar paragraph

debate scan boundary incurable engage promise

exploration disable theory seek that(adv.) misunderstand

scientific method observe match predict astronomer

curious microscope telescope punish intelligent patient

be similar to work on go by be/get engaged to sb. use up

go on with dream of turn out be satisfied with

take a look at the other way round on fire

make a difference be curious to do sth./ about sth. / that –clause

The infinitive used as predictive/ adverbial / attribute / subject/ object

Ⅱ.The analysis of the teaching material

The topic of this unit is “ making a difference”. In this unit, first we can learn about the science subjects and know the importance of each subject. Second, we can get familiar with some great scientists and their famous quotes and achievements, such as Stephen Hawking, Galileo, Albert Einstein, ZhangHeng and so on. Third, we will know how the discoveries and inventions of the great scientists help us better understand the world and improve our life. By knowing this, students are encouraged to study hard, and their love of science and their hope of becoming scientists are inspired.

1.Warming up: It offers us five pictures of foreign great scientists with their famous quotes. By learning their quotes and talking about their achievements, students can know about the key to success and make their minds to be successful.

2. Listening: It contains 4 great minds including the students. In fact, it provides three passages and the students are asked to have a guess who they are, which is so interesting that it may further arouse the students’ enthusiasm in science.

3. Speaking: The students are asked to have a debate about which branch of science is the most important and useful to society. By doing so, students can practice debating skills and use some useful expressions freely. At the same time, they will find that knowledge plays an important part in our daily life.

4.Pre-reading The three questions in pre-reading pave the way for reading.

5.Reading: The text describes Hawking’s disease, dream, achievements and opinions on science and scientific research.

6. Post-reading: The exercises help the students further understand this great scientist.

7. Language study It contains word study and grammar. Students will have a better knowledge of the uses of the infinitive in this part.

8.Integrating skills It includes reading and writing. In the reading passage, students can learn about characteristics of five scientists and their scientific spirit. In the writing part, students are asked to write a paragraph to describe a favourite scientist.

9. Tips Unit One also gives students some advice on how to use the scientific method to learn English.

It sums up the uses of the infinitive.

Period 1&2: Warming up, listening and speaking

Period 6: Integrating skills and writing

Notes:

1. Amending In warming up, it’s too abstract for the students to talk about the quotes, so we deal with it as a unit task to the students at the very beginning―make up a column about scientists and their quotes.

2. Replacement In speaking, the text gives the students the debate: Which branch of science is more important and useful to our society?

It’s too difficult and abstract for the students to carry it out. The reasons are as follows:

1) Their vocabulary is not large enough.

2) It’s too difficult to divide each branch of science in our daily life.

In fact, each branch can’t be divided from the others. Only by combining them together, can we make our world more beautiful.

So we change the topic, and ask the students to talk about what has happened in our daily life. That is , should a nuclear power station be built in Sanmen? This topic can give the students lots of space to talk about.

3. Adding This unit doesn’t give a good sample for the students to write about a scientist. So it is also very difficult for the students to do the writing well. Because of this, we add a research task to the students after finishing the reading material No Boundaries. (What is science and what is the spirit of a scientist? Do research on your favorite scientist and try to find out what makes him /her successful. The students are asked to finish the task by surfing the Internet.) With the help of the first unit task--- to make up a column about scientists and their quotes, it’s possible for the students to write a good article about a favorite scientist.

Period 1&2: Warming up, listening & speaking

Goals:

1.To encourage the students talk about the science and scientists

2.To develop the students’ ability of listening for information

3.To enable the students to have a better understanding of the importance of science.

T: Nice to see you again. I miss you very much. And I’m glad to meet some new students here! Nice to meet you!

T: What makes you get together here/ get apart with your former classmates ?

Some of us learn arts/ science while others learn science / arts.

1. What are arts subjects? What are science subjects?

Why do you learn arts/ science?

I’m good / poor at…

I prefer … to…

I’m into…

Because I like/ dislike...

My parents want me to…

My dream is…

What is your dream? What will you do to make your dream come true?

Having heard your dreams, I am glad to know all of you have great mind. I’m sure one day you’ll become great minds (great men /women).Before we realize our dreams, we should learn about some great minds first so that we can follow them, do you think so?

What great scientists do you know?

Enjoy the video, listen carefully and find out who are mentioned in the video.

(Copernicus, Galileo, Kepler and Newton.)

Enjoy once more. What are they famous for?

Listen to the three passages , finish the exercises and talk about the scientists.

Enjoy a video and do the listening comprehension on the screen.

Thanks to the discovery of Madam Curie---- Uranium ( show the slide) and the equation of Einstein ( slide ), nuclear power station can be built nowadays. It is reported a nuclear power station is being built in Sanmen. Someone says it is a good thing, while others don’t think so. (Show slides to help the students learn more about the disadvantages and advantages of it.)

Debating (Should a nuclear power station be built in Sanmen?)

The following useful expression may give the students help.

That’s correct. It’s clear that… I doubt that …

That’s true. It’s hard to say. Well, maybe, but …

There is no doubt that… What’s your idea? Have you thought about …?

1. Finish off the WB listening.

2. Make up a column about scientists and their quotes

Period 3 & 4 : Pre-reading , reading & post-reading

Goals:

1. To get to know something about the famous scientist Stephen Hawking.

2. To learn the spirit of Hawking

3. To develop some basic skills of reading

During the last period, we talked about a lot of scientists and their great achievements.

Can you use one adjective to describe science?

Do you know any disabled scientist?

Today we are going to talk about a disabled scientist.

Enjoy the video and guess who he is.

Does he move his lips while speaking?

Listen and answer:

1). How does he make a speech without moving his lips?

2) What is it that Hawking doesn’t like about his speech computer?

(It gives him an American accent.)

T: Do you want to know more about Hawking? S: Yes.

T: What do you want to know about him? S: his family, his achievements…

Skim the text and give one word to each paragraph.

1) How would ordinary people feel when they were told that they had an incurable disease?

2) What did Stephen Hawking do when he was told that he had an incurable disease?

3) What is Hawking’s dream?

4) Read Para3 and Para4. Fill in the blanks.

5. What are the steps of the scientific method?

6. How do people misunderstand science?

7. What is Hawking’s opinion about science?

Now we know that in Hawking’s opinion even the best theory can turn out to be wrong.

1. Suppose Hawking’s theory of Black Holes was found wrong by himself, would he admit it ? Have a discussion and give your reasons.

2. Show the students the fact with the slide.

How do you understand the title “No boundaries”?

Suggested answers:

Unanswered questions have no boundaries.

in thinking.

imagination.

between truth and falsehood (谬误)

the healthy and the disabled.

Step4.Homework:

What is science and what is the spirit of a scientist? Do research on your favorite scientist and try to find out what makes him /her successful.

Use a library or the Internet to finish the research work.

Goals:

1. To get the students to reflect on the useful words and phrases in this unit

2. To enable the students to have a better knowledge of the uses of the Infinitive

Teaching Procedures:

1.Ask the students to tell the spirits of disabled people and what they can learn from them.

2.Finish the exercises in the SB Page 5

Suggested answers:

1.(A)这对夫妇花光了所有的钱去找他们六个月前失踪的五岁儿子.

2.(C)大家很容易看出她不高兴.

3.(B)牛顿自言自语: “为什么苹果会落到地上,而不会飘向空中?”。后来，他发现了万有引力定律.

4.(A)科学家预言在未来的十年内,环境污染会更加严重.他们告诫人们如果不采取措施解决这个问题，我们将会毁灭我们的星球.

5.(B)哈利观察这个物体的运动已有多年了,并且预测它每76年回来一次.

6.(A)警察发现这个人的指纹和在犯罪现场提取的不一样后,就放他走了.

A. (Look at the sentences on the screen. Ask the Ss to tell the function of the underlined part in each sentence.)

1. We’re surprised to hear the news. (Adverbial)

2. We have to get up early to catch the first train. (Adverbial)

3. He is considered to be a great scientist. (Object)

4. To see is to believe. (Subject, Predictive)

5. I have a lot of words to say. (Attribute)

6. It’s impossible for him to go there alone. (Subject)

7. She promised to make no mistakes at all. (Object)

8. I find it difficult to understand him . (Object)

B. Summarize the form of the Infinitive:

不定式的简单式由to+动词原形构成,其动作与主要动词同时发生或者发生在主要动词之后.

不定式的进行式由to be +现在分词构成,表示在主要动词的动作发生时,不定试的动作正在进行中.

不定式的完成式由to have+过去分词构成,表示不定式的动作发生在主要动词的动作之前.

Show the video of the explanation of the uses of the Infinitive to the students. Help the Ss master the Infinitive better.

Exercises高考回顾:

1. The purpose of new technologies is to make life easier ________ it more difficult. (MET99)B

A. not make B. not to make C. not making D. do not make

2. I’ve worked with children before, so I know what ______ in my new job. (MET)B

A. expected B. to expect C. to be expecting D. expects

3. Having a trip abroad is certainly good for the old couples but it remains ______ whether they will enjoy it. (MET)B

A. to see B. to be seen C. seeing D. seen

4. Charles Babbage is generally considered ____the first computer. (MET1993)C

C. to have invented D. having invented

5. Allen had to call a taxi because the box was _______ to carry all the way home. (MET)A

A.much too heavy B.too much heavy C.heavy too much D.too heavy much

6. The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street, but his mother told him ______. (MET95)A

A. not to B. not to do C. not do it D. do not to

7. Little Jim should love _____ to the theatre this evening. (MET 92)A

A. to be taken B. to take C. being taken D. taking

8. There are five pairs ___, but I'm at a loss which to buy.(上海高考)B

A. to be chosen B. to choose from C. to choose D. for choosing

9.____late in the afternoon, Bob turned off the alarm. (北京春季高考)A

A. To sleep B. Sleeping C. Sleep D. Having sleep

10. With a lot of difficult problems ____, the newly-elected president is having a hard time.(上海春季高考)C

A. settled B. settling C. to settle D. being settled

11. She will tell us why she feels so strongly that each of us has a role ___in making the earth a better place to live. (2003上海春季高考)B

A. to have played B. to play C. to be played D. to be playing

12. In order to gain a bigger share in the international market, many state run companies are trying ___their products more competitive.

A. to make B. making C. to have made D. having mad

13. The teacher asked us___ so much noise. (2003北京春季高考)D

A. don't make B. not make C. not making D. not to make

14. I've worked with children before, so I know what ____in my new job.

A. expected B. to expect C. to be expecting D. expects

1.Is there anything to eat?

2.I need a pen to write with.

3.Do you have anything to add?

4.He is looking for a box to put the two rabbits in.

5.It would be a comfortable house to live in .

Finish off the exercises in WB.

Period 6 Integrating skills & writing

Goals:

1. To revise the language points and grammar-the Infinitive in this unit.

2. To learn more about the characteristics of scientists

3. To write a paragraph about a scientist.

Teaching Procedures:

T: yesterday we learned the grammar-the Infinitive. We know that the infinitive can be used as the Subject, Object, Adverbial and so on. Now let's do some exercises to see if you have mastered them well enough. Fill in the blanks, using the Infinitive。(Show the following on the screen）

Look at the screen.

1.The goal of Stephen Hawking’s research is to__and to___is his greatest dream.

2.The doctor thought he only had three more years to __, which turned out ____.

3.We took a taxi to ___.We hurried there ,only to ____.We were unhappy to___.

4.He studied hard to _____.

5.Lunch is ready. Let’s stop to _____.

Suggested answers:

1.discover nature of the universe; get married

3.catch the train; find the train had gone; miss the train

T: Now let’s revise the useful expressions in this unit together.

Fill in the blanks with the right phrases in the box

1.He __one day becoming a famous singer

2.John __Mary.

3.Two weeks slowly_____.

4.His suggestion ____to be a good one.

5.We ____ our money.

6.For we can’t finish copying the essay today, we have to ____it tomorrow.

7.Tom ____a story-book.

Suggested answers:

1.dreams of 2.is engaged to 3.went by 4.turned out

5.have used up 6. go on with 7.is working on

T: There were many scientists in the world in the past. They made great contributions to our society. They help us understand the world better. Do you know why and how they made these important discoveries or inventions? OK. Today we are going to read a passage. It will tell us what makes the scientists make their discoveries.

Who are mentioned in the text? (Hawking, Bacon, Zhang Heng, Galileo, Copernicus)

Match the following:

Zhang Heng A Brief History of Time

Galileo the solar system with the sun as its center

What characteristics should a scientist have?

imagination diligence confidence

How do you understand the title?

(* have a great effect on something *make contributions to the world

* make good changes to the world *gain achievements)

T: Who is your favourite scientist?

( The students may have different answers.)

Write a paragraph about a favorite scientist according to what they have done about the famous scientists.

Tips: What do you want to write?

What does the reader need to know about the scientist?

How can you best describe him or her?

What is the most important or interesting fact about the scientist?

Why do you like him or her?

( write a description of a scientist according to the tips)

高二英语设计教案 篇6

We lived in a small house.

(1)New words: life ,different, ago, any, television, grandchildren, us, grandmother, lady

(2)New sentences：There were/weren’t …. There are….

We lived…many years ago. We live…now.

2、能力目标：

(1)能根据情境正确使用There be ……,We lived…many years ago. We live…now.句型谈论生活、学习中的事物

(2)培养学生听、说、读、写的能力。

教学重点：：如何让学生在课堂上学会There be …, We lived…many years ago. We live…now.句型并能在生活中灵活运用该句型。

写出下列动词的过去式。

二.合作探究，学习课文。

1)播放课文录音，让学生在听录音的同时找出课文中出现的新单词与新句型。

2)进行游戏“火眼金睛找生词新句”。让学生以竞赛抢答的形式快速找出课文中出现的新单词与新句型。

3)在让学生初步了解了课文内容后，教师再次播放录音，让学生大声跟读课文。

巩固练习;

重点句式操练Listen and say。先让学生听录音，跟读句子，明确本课的重点句式，然后让他们灵活运用句式：There is/are……/There was/were……造句。

让学生准备，谈论图中内容，然后选择几个代表来讲给全班同学听。回忆课文内容，试着用重点句复述课文。

引导学生对本节所学内容进行归纳总结：运用句式…There be.We lived…many years ago . We live …now.谈论及比较过去和现在的生活。

课后反思：

高二英语设计教案 篇7

Tasks which should be achieved in this unit:

a. Achieve language skills and related knowledge about the topic of water and the ocean.

b. Learn how to make suggestions and how to express opinions.

The water is being used to /for….

We should/ could….

If we …, we can ….

It would be better to …

c. Vocabulary in this unit:

benefit, disadvantage, range, available, pure, mass, float, absorb, stable, bottom;

d. Useful expressions:

benefit from, range from … to…., all the way, be made up of, that is, freezing point, break down, mix with, be measured in…, take advantage of…, keep … steady, manage to do.

e. Grammar:

Review Modal Verbs.

情态动词can, could, may, might, will, would, shall, should, must, can’t 等的用法。

Jin can speak English well. (ability)

Could you please show me the way to Beihai Park? (request)

May we see the awards for the teams? (permission; request)

She might give you some new clothing. (possibility)

The Spring Festival is the most fun. The whole family will come for dinner. (promise; agreement)

Often he would dress up like a rich man. (past habit; custom)

The harvest festival begins on Saturday. We shall be there with our friends. (promise; agreement)

You should arrive at the airport two hours before he goes. (advice)

Wang Feng wins an award every year. He must be very strong (speculation)

You must be joking. That can’t be true. (guessing)

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn and master the new words and the useful expressions of this part.

Words: cube, sailor, disadvantages, entertainment

Phrases: come up with, happen to

Useful expressions: The water is being used to/for…

We should/could…

If we…we can…

It would be better…

2. Learn something about water by doing experiment.

3. Do some listening.

4. Improve the students’ speaking ability by talking.

Teaching Important Points:

1. Make the students be free to talk about water.

2. Improve the students’ listening ability by listening.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1. How to finish the task of speaking.

2. How to improve the students’ listening ability.

Teaching Methods:

1. Listening-and-answering activity to help the students go through with the listening material.

2. Individual, pair or group work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

3. an empty glass, a bottle of water and a bottle of vegetable oil

Teaching Procedures:

T: Attention, please. As we all know, every year during the Spring Festival and Lantern Festival in our country, people like to see the lion dance and guess the riddles. Do you like to guess the riddle, then?

T: OK. Now I have a riddle. Please guess it.

(Teacher uses the multimedia to show the riddle on the screen.)

It’s very important to all the animals and plants.

It’s also important to human beings.

It’s liquid at room temperature.

Every day you keep in touch with it.

You can’t live without it.

Ss: It’s very easy. It’s water.

T: Yeah, today we will talk about water. Now please tell me what you know about water.

S1: Water is used to drink.

S2: Water can be used to water the flowers.

S3: I think water can be used to make electricity.

T: Thank you for your ideas. Next we will make some interesting experiments. Maybe you can learn more about water from the following experiments. S4, would you like to come here to help me?

T: Now, look at Li Lei and me. We will begin. You should watch the experiment carefully and try to tell me what happens and why.

(Teacher puts a bottle of water, a bottle of vegetable oil and an empty glass on the desk.)

T: S4, pour some water and some vegetable oil into the empty glass. Other students, please watch carefully.

Ss: Fantastic! The liquid in the glass has become two parts.

T: Try to describe it in detail.

S5: Let me try. The part above is vegetable oil and the part below is water. But I don’t know why.

T: Good question. Who’d like to answer his question? (Nobody answers his question.)

T: Perhaps it is a little difficult to answer it immediately. Now you can have a discussion about the reason for it, using what you have learnt in physics.

(Teacher lets students discuss in groups of four. A few minutes later, teacher checks their answers.)

T: Who wants to explain the phenomenon?

S6: I think water is heavier than oil, so vegetable oil is on the top of the water.

T: Who has different ideas?

S7: I think we should say that the density of water is higher than the density of vegetable oil, so the result formed.

S8: What’s the meaning of “density”?

S9:“Density” is “密度” in Chinese.

T: Do you agree with the reason for it?

Ss: Yes. We agree with the idea.

T: As we know, if we pour milk and water into one glass, we can’t tell where water is and where milk is. But just now we poured oil and water into one glass, it is so different now. Do you know why?

Ss: Because oil can’t dissolve in water, but milk can.

T: Very good. Let’s make a summary about the experiment. If we pour vegetable oil and water into one glass, the liquid will become two parts because oil can’t dissolve in water. Since the density of water is higher than vegetable oil, vegetable oil will be on top of the water. Is that clear?

T: Would you like to watch another experiment?

T: OK. I’ll perform the next experiment by myself. Look at me. I have a glass of water. Now I’ll cover it with a piece of thick paper. Attention, please.

(Teacher puts one hand on the paper and turns the glass upside down. Then teacher slowly takes his/her hand away from the paper.)

Ss: The piece of paper doesn’t fall and the water in the glass doesn’t flow.

T: Yes. You are right. Now you are given a few minutes to have a discussion about the reason for it.

(Teacher gives students a few minutes to discuss, and then checks their answers.)

T: Who can tell us the reason why the piece of paper doesn’t fall and the water doesn’t flow?

S10: I want to have a try. When the glass of water covered with a piece of paper is turned upside down, the pressure from air to the piece of paper is bigger than the pressure from the water in the glass to the piece of paper. So the paper won’t fall and the water won’t flow.

T: Excellent! Thank you for your explanation. I am very glad to see that you are all interested in making experiments. After class, you can carry out another two experiments on Page 17.When you perform them, try to describe what happens and why. OK?

T: Now, let’s look at a picture.

(Teacher shows a picture on the screen.)

Ss: There is a river in the picture, but it’s very dirty.

S11: There are some plastic bags and empty tins on the surface of the river.

T: Yes. We all know water is important to human beings and all the animals and plants. Unfortunately water is being polluted now. What do you think we can do to protect the water on our planet?

(Teacher gives students enough time to prepare. When they prepare, teacher goes among the students to help them to express their ideas correctly.)

Sample answer:

To protect the water on our planet, I think we should save every drop of water and stop throwing rubbish into water. Besides, we should try our best to help the people around us realize the importance of using and protecting our water.

T: Next, let’s do some listening. Turn to Page 18 and look at the Listening part. You can listen to the famous poems about life on the ocean. Listen carefully and write down some key words when you listen. Before you listen, let’s learn two phrases first. Look at the blackboard.

e.g. What happened to you last week?

If anything happens to the machine, please tell me.

e.g. I hope you can come up with a better plan than this.

(Teacher writes them on the blackboard and begins to explain them.)

(Teacher plays the tape for the first time. Then play it for the second time. During this time, teacher may pause for students to write down the information. Play some parts of the tape one more time if necessary. Finally teacher checks the answers with the whole class.)

T: In our daily life, water can be used in different ways. Now we’ll talk about the ways in which water can be used. Look at the pictures on Page 18.The six pictures mean six different ways to use water. You can choose one of the pictures to discuss the importance of using and protecting our water, and then try to use some sentences to describe the picture you choose. If you like, you can make a dialogue with your partner about the picture. When you discuss, you may use the questions on the screen to help you.

1. How is the water being used?

2. Is this a good way to use water?

3. Why do we use water in this way?

4. Who benefits from using water in this way?

5. What are some disadvantages of using water in this way?

(Teacher shows the questions on the screen by multimedia and gives students enough time to discuss and prepare.)

Suggested answers:

(Picture 1)We can use water to make electricity, which can give us light and make us feel warm. I think it is a good way to use water.

(Picture 3) Water has a lot of usages and home use is the commonest one. Every day we must drink enough water. In addition, we need a lot of water, just for cooking and keeping clean. Water can help us to keep healthy. But if the waste water from home use is poured into river and soil, it will be harmful for some animals and plants. So we must pay more attention to it.

(Picture 4) In Picture 4, water is being used in industry. Water is very important to industry. It can be used to make paper, cool machine and so on. But the disadvantage is that a lot of water mixed with some poisonous things being poured into the river and the sea. It is dangerous for the living things in the water.

A: Do you know how the water is being used in Picture 6?

B: Water is being used for entertainment.

A: Is it a good way to use water?

B: Yes, because it can help people keep fit and enjoy nature. But if people throw rubbish into the water, it will be bad for us.

A: Yes. It is the disadvantage of using water in this way. We must be careful.

T: Today, we’re mainly learned something about water by doing experiments, speaking and listening. Besides, we’ve learnt some new words and phrases, such as: happen to, come up with, density,…

After class, try to remember them and preview the next part-Reading part. That’s all for today. Goodbye, everyone.

Step Ⅵ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

e.g. What happened to you last week?

If anything happens to the machine, please tell me.

e.g. I hope you can come up with a better plan than this.

Teaching Aims:

1. Learn and master the following words and phrases:

cube,property,range,medium,relatively,dissolve,pure,relationship,mass,float,absorb,bottom,all the way, that is, add…to, mix with, take advantage of, manage to do

2. Improve the students’ reading ability.

3. Enable the students to realize that it is important to protect the water on our planet.

Teaching Important Points:

1. Improve the students’ reading ability.

2. Master the following phrases:

all the way, that is, mix with, take advantage of, manage to do

Teaching Difficult Point:

How do we make the students understand the reading passage better.

Teaching Methods:

1. Discussion before reading to make the students interested in what they will learn.

2. Fast reading to get a general idea of the text.

3. Discussion after reading to make students understand what they’ve learned better.

4. Careful reading to get the detailed information in the text.

Teaching Aids:

Teaching Procedures:

(Greet the whole class as usual.)

T: Yesterday we learnt something about water. Now who can tell me what you learned yesterday?

S1: I learned that water is very important to all the living things on the earth.

T: OK, can you give me the reason why it is important?

S2: Water can be used to wash clothing, to made electricity, to water the farm and so on. Of course, every day we must drink enough water. So water is very important.

S3:I know something about water. For example, from the experiments we made yesterday, I know vegetable oil can’t be dissolved by water.

T: OK. Thank you for your answers to my questions. As we all know, we can’t live without water. But do you know what makes water so important to all the living things?

T: Maybe we can get the answer to the question after reading the article for today. Before you read, first let’s learn the new words and phrases in the passage.

(Teacher deals with the new words with the whole class.)

T: Now please read the passage quickly to get the general idea and try to use the following structures to make six questions.

(Teacher uses multimedia to show the structures on the screen.)

1. What is/are ______?

2. What does ______ look like?

3. What are different parts of ______?

4. What can ______ be compared to?

5. How does ______ work?

6. What are some examples of ______?

(Teacher gives students five minutes to finish the fast reading and making questions. Five minutes later, teacher asks some students to write their questions on the blackboard.)

1. What are the properties of water?

2. What does the earth look like?

3. What are different parts of the ocean?

4. What can the ocean be compared to?

5.How does the special air-conditioner-the ocean work?

6. What are some examples of species in the ocean?

T: Well done. Who can tell me the general idea of the text?

S4: The passage mainly tells us it is water that makes the ocean so important to all the living things in the world.

T: Good work. Next, let’s read the passage carefully to get more information about water. While you are reading, try to finish the chart in Post-reading on Page 21 and find out the answers to the questions on the blackboard.

(Teacher gives students enough time to read the text and collects their information for the chart.)

Suggested answers:

Property What is it? What is it good for?

Chemical structure Every water molecule is made up of two hydrogen atoms and one oxygen atom. It is good for the living things in the ocean to absorb the nutrients easily.

Density The density of pure water is 1 000 kg/m3, meaning that one cubic metre of water weighs one thousand kilogram. It is good for marine organisms to take advantage of the density of water.

Heat capacity Heat capacity is the amount of energy it takes to raise the temperature of a substance one degree centigrade. It is good for the earth to keep the temperature steady.

T: Very good. What about the questions on the blackboard?

S5: I think I can answer the first one. The answer is that the properties of water are chemical structure, salinity density, heat capacity and ocean motion.

S6: In my opinion, the answer to the fourth question is that the ocean can be compared to a great place to live in.

T: Do you agree with them?

T: What about other questions?

S7: I think plankton, sharks and whales are examples of species in the ocean.

S8: The answer to the second one is that the earth looks like an ocean planet.

T: You are quite right. Any volunteers?

S9: Dear teacher. Can you tell us the meaning of the special air-conditioner-the ocean?

T: Maybe it means that there are some similarities between air-conditioner and the ocean.

S9: Thank you. I got it.

T: Then, who can answer the question?

S10: Because the ocean can keep the temperature of the earth steady, some students compare the ocean to a special air-conditioning. I think the ocean keeps the temperature of the earth steady by absorbing and releasing heat.

T: Well done. There is only one question left. Who wants to try?(Nobody answers the question.)

T: Do you think it is a question that the text can’t answer?

T: OK. Maybe you are right. But I want to know the reason why you think the passage can’t answer the third question.

Ss: Because there is not any information about the different parts of the ocean.

T: Then, are there any questions you would need to add to “cover” all the information in the text?

S11: I have a question. Why is the water in the ocean always moving?

S12: Since changes in salinity and temperature affect water’s density, the water in the ocean is always moving.

Step Ⅲ Further Understanding and Language Study

T: Well done. I think you are very familiar with the passage. In the passage there are some words and expressions we should master. Now let’s look at the screen. I will give you some explanations about the words and expressions.

1. incredibly adv. (extremely or unusually)

e.g. The water is incredibly hot.

2. available adj.(that can be used or obtained)

e.g. Tickets are available at the box office.

The book is available to all the students.

3. range vi.

e.g. Their ages range from 25 to 50.

His interests ranged from chess to canoeing.

4.But the way the water molecule…

e.g. I don’t like the way (in which/that) he looks at me.

They admired the way (in which/that) she dealt with the crisis.

5. that is (to say) (which means)

e.g. A week later, that is, May 1 is her birthday.

He is a local government administrator, that is, he is a Civil Servant.

6. take advantage of (make use of something well/make use of somebody unfairly)

e.g. They took full advantage of the hotel’s facilities.

She took advantage of my generosity.

7. be sensitive to something (affected easily by something)

e.g. She is very sensitive to other’s words.

(Teacher writes the words, phrases and sentences on the blackboard.)

Step Ⅳ Listening and Reading Aloud

T: Let’s listen to the tape. When I play it for the first time, just listen to it. When I play it for the second time, please listen and repeat. Then read the text aloud. Are you clear about that?

(Te teacher plays the tape for the students to listen. After listening ,the teacher goes among the students and corrects any mistake the students make in pronunciation, stress and intonation.)

T: Today, we have read a passage about water. As we know, it is very important to all the living things. So we should do all we can to protect water from being polluted. In addition, try your best to retell the passage in your own words. Is that clear?

Step Ⅵ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Questions:

1. What are the properties of water?

2. What does the earth look like?

3. What are different parts of the ocean?

4. What can the ocean be compared to?

5.How does the special air-conditioner-the ocean work?

6. What are some examples of species in the ocean?

Phrases: range from A to B, that is, take advantage of, be sensitive to

Sentences: But the way the water molecule…

Teaching Aims:

1. Review Modal Verbs.

2. Do some exercises to review some important words learnt in the last period.

Teaching Important Point:

Review Modal Verbs.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How do we help the students correctly use the Modal Verbs.

Teaching Methods:

1. Review method to help the students remember all the Modal Verbs they have learnt before and use them correctly.

2. Individual work or group work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

Teaching Procedures:

(Greet the whole class as usual.)

T: Yesterday we learned a passage about water and now who can retell the passage in your own words?

T: Well done. Thank you for your performance.

T: Now please turn to Page 21.Look at the first part of Word Study. There are some words learnt in the last period, but the letters of these words are in the wrong order. Now I will give you a few minutes to put the letters in the correct order.

(A few minutes later, teacher may ask some students to spell their answers and give the Chinese meaning of each word to all the students. Finally teacher writes the correct words on the blackboard.)

T: Good work. Next look at the screen and try to complete the following sentences by filling in the blanks with the proper words. The first letter has been given and some words can be used more than once. If you need, you can have a discussion with your partner.

(Teacher uses the multimedia to show the following sentences on the screen.)

1. The water molecule is made up of two h_____ atoms and one o_____.

2.Water is a l_____ at room temperature, but it turns into a s_____ when the temperature drops below 0℃ and into a g_____ when heated above 100℃.

3. An a_____ is the smallest part of any living or nonliving thing.

4. Places by the sea often have a s_____ climate that is never too hot or too cold, because water can a_____ and release a lot of heat.

5. Soil can a______ water, so it helps keep water from flowing away.

6. Marine scientists study the r_____ between living creatures and their habitat in the ocean.

7. Salt water has a lower f______ point and is heavier than fresh water.

8. Oil has a density lower than 1000 kg/m3, so it will f______ on water.

(Teacher gives students enough time to prepare and then check their answers.)

Suggested answers:

1. hydrogen, oxygen 2.liquid,solid,gas

T: Up to now we have learnt many modal verbs. Who can tell me what they are?

(Teacher asks some students to write their answers on the blackboard.)

Modal Verbs:

can/ could, may/might, will/would, be able to, must, should, have to, need, shall, ought to, had better.

T: Very good. Then do you know how to use them?

S2:I know “should” can be used to give others some advice.

S3:I know when I want to borrow a book from my friend, I can use “may”.

…

T: Your answers are very good. There is a conclusion about modal verbs on the screen. Let’s look at it.

(Teacher uses the multimedia to show the conclusion on the screen.)

Modal Verbs:

Possibility: can/could, may/might

Requests: can/could, will/would, would like

Necessity: must, have to, have got to, need

Permission: can/could, may/might

Suggestions: could may/might, shall

Advice: should, ought to, had better

T: From the chart we can see modal verbs can be classified into eight groups by their usages. Are you clear about the classification?

T: OK. Now look at the first part in Grammar. Finish the exercises. If you need, you can discuss with your partner. In addition you’d better make it clear why you choose A、B、C, or D. Are you clear about the requirements?

(Teacher gives students enough time to finish the exercises. Then deals with them with the whole class.)

T: OK. Who’d like to tell me the answer to the first one?

S4:I think “A” is right.

T: Can you tell us the reason why you choose “A”?

S4: Because the speaker wants to express his/her request. Among A、B、C and D, only A can be used to express request.

T: Very good. What about the second one?

S5:“May” is right, I think, because the sentence is used to ask for permission.

T: Congratulations! Who can answer the third one?

S6:The phrase “wants to” express a state of being necessity. So I think “C” is right.

T: Well done. It’s turn to do the fourth one. Who can try?

S7: I’m not sure, but I want to have a try. Is “C” right?

T: Why did you choose “C”?

S8: I think the first sentence expresses some necessity and the second one expresses guess.

S9: I don’t think so. Because “must” can’t be used in negative sentences to express guess.

S8: Oh, I’m sorry. I forgot it. I see, the correct answer is “D”.

(Teacher encourages students to show their opinions about each one, and then teacher gives the correct answers and some necessary explanations.)

Suggested answers:

1. A 2.A 3.C 4.D 5.A 6.A 7.A 8.B 9.A

T: You have finished the first part successfully. Now let’s go on with the second part. Do you have confidence to finish it?

Ss: Yes. Of course we have.

T: OK. This is a letter from Mary to John. Maybe John met some problems, so Mary wants to write a letter to help him. But Mary doesn’t know how to use the modal verbs correctly. She wants you to help her finish the letter. Before you finish the letter, read it to get the general idea of it first and then answer the questions on the screen.

(Teacher uses multimedia to show the questions on the screen.)

1. Can you tell from the letter what John’s problem is?

2. Do you agree on the advice that Mary gives to him? Why? What would be your advice?

(Teacher gives students a few minutes to read the letter, and then checks their answers to the questions.)

T: Who’d like to answer the first question?

S10: I want to have a try. In my opinion, John’s problem is that his manager suspected him of stealing something at the meat factory.

T: Well done. Do you agree with him?

T: What about the second one?

S11:I’d like to answer the question. I don’t agree to the advice that Mary gives to him. Because if he finds another job, maybe it means that he really stole something at the meat factory. I think he should tell the manager that he didn’t do it and advise the manager to call in the police to make it clear.

S12: In my opinion, he’d better try to find out who is the real thief to prove that he didn’t do anything wrong.

…

T: I think your suggestions are all very helpful to John and I hope he can find a good way to deal with the problem. Now you are clear about John’s problem. It’s your turn to help Mary finish the letter. Maybe there are more than one answer for some blanks. If you have some difficulties, you can discuss with your partner. Five minutes later, I will check your answers.

Suggested answers:

not/might not,must,could/should,might/would,will,might/may/could/would,might,would/could/might,should,will

T: Today, we’ve reviewed some new words learnt in this unit. In particular, we have reviewed the usages of modal verbs. After class, do more exercises to master them better. Time is up. That’s all for today. See you tomorrow.

Step Ⅴ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Words:

atom, amount, solid, absorb, centigrade gas, hydrogen, oxygen, mass, float

Modal Verbs: can/could, may/might, will/would, need, must, have to, shall, should, ought to, had better

Teaching Aims:

1. Review the useful expressions learnt in this unit by practising.

2. Improve the students’ reading ability by reading the material.

3. Improve the students’ writing ability.

4. Enable the students to realize that it is important to protect the estuary.

Teaching Important Points:

1. Improve the students’ reading ability by reading the material.

2. Improve the students’ writing ability.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to improve the students’ integrating skills-reading and writing.

Teaching Methods:

1. Fast reading to go through the reading material.

2. Inductive method to help students write a paragraph successfully.

Teaching Aids:

Teaching Procedures:

Greet the whole class as usual.

T: Yesterday we did some practice about modal verbs. Now let’s do some more exercises to see if you have mastered them. Please look at the screen.

(Teacher uses multimedia to show the exercises on the screen.)

Fill in the blanks using must/might/may/can/could and their negative forms.

1.-I saw Mary in the street yesterday.

-You ______ have seen her. She is still in Australia.

2.-Could I use your bike?

-Yes, of course you ______.

3. The ground is wet. It ______ have rained last night.

4. A machine ______ think for itself. It ______ be told what to do.

5. Tom, don’t play with the valuable bottle. You ______ break it.

Suggested answers:

1. can’t 2.can 3.must 4.can’t,must 5.may/might

T: Good work. But if we want to use the modal verbs correctly, we must practise them as often as possible. Today we will read another passage. The ocean is very important to all the living things, which is known to us, and I think we have also known about the reason why the ocean becomes so important-because of the properties of water, the ocean is very important. The passage we will read is also about water. It deals with “the body of water”.Are you interested in the topic?

S1:Yes.But what is the meaning of “the body of water”?I think water has no body.

T: Good question. I think you can get the answer to the question by yourself. Now let’s read the passage. While you are reading, try to make clear what is the main idea of each paragraph. Besides, try fast reading, it is helpful to improve your reading ability.

(Teacher gives students a few minutes to read the passage.)

T: Have you finished your reading?

T: Wang Lin, are you clear about “the body of water”?

S2:Yes.I think “the body of water” means the main part of water.

T: You are great! Now who’d like to tell me the main idea of the first paragraph?

S3: An estuary is the body of water where a river meets the ocean.

T: Right, thank you for your answer. What about the second one?

S4: Let me try. The general idea is that estuaries are great places for nature’s young.

T: Wang Ping, tell me the main idea of the third paragraph, please!

S5: I’m not sure. I think the third paragraph tells us estuaries are important to animals and plants, so we should try our best to protect them from environmental pollution. Am I right?

T: Yes. Congratulations! There is only the last paragraph left. Who can try?

S6: I think the main idea of the last paragraph is that estuaries are also important to human beings because they not only provide recreation and education for us but also contribute to the economy.

Step Ⅳ Discussion and Explanation

T: The general idea of the passage is very clear to us now. Now let’s re-read the passage carefully. While you are reading, try to find out the answers to the questions on Page 23.If you need, you can have a discussion about them. Then I’ll check your answers.

(Teacher gives students enough time to read the passage. At the same time, teacher goes among them and helps them express their own opinions in English correctly.)

Suggested answers:

1. Tides provide energy for the ecosystem, and estuaries are protected from waves and storms by islands. In addition nutrients arrive in estuaries from both the land and the ocean. So estuaries are great places for nature’s young ones.

2. Density means the quality of being dense. In other words, there are more living creatures than any other habitat on earth.

3. Estuaries can make our water clean by absorbing nutrients and pollutants from water coming from inland sources.

4. The function that estuaries can absorb pollutants and nutrients makes estuaries very sensitive to environmental pollution.

5. Estuaries can provide recreation and education for human beings. Besides, estuaries also contribute to the economy. So they are very important to human beings.

T: Well done. Now you are very familiar with the passage.

To understand the passage better, I will explain some important phrases .Please, look at the blackboard.

(Teacher writes the following phrases on the blackboard.)

e.g. The company will provide food and drink for them.

2. have an opportunity to do something

e.g I had no opportunity to discuss the problem with her yesterday.

e.g. He left for a variety of reasons.

There are a variety of patterns for you to choose from.

e.g. His work has contributed to our understanding of this difficult subject.

T: Up to now, we have learnt a lot about water and known the properties of water and importance of estuaries. Now you are given an opportunity to check if you know a lot about water. Look at the questions on the screen.

(Teacher uses multimedia to show the questions on the screen.)

1. Why does an ice cube float?

2. What will happen to a piece of metal if you put it in water?

3. Why do so many species live in estuaries?

4. Why have so many cities been built by estuaries?

T: Now imagine that your science teacher asks you to choose one of the questions and write a paragraph to explain it. Use what you learn from this unit and what you know about nature and science to write the paragraph. You must be careful to explain it to make your explanations easy to understand. You’d better look at the tips on Page 24 before you write. It’s of great help to your writing.

Possible samples:

Salt water from the ocean and fresh water from the river mix together in an estuary. The mixing of fresh and salt water creates a unique environment filled with life of all kinds. Here, animals can enjoy all the benefits of the oceans without having to face many of its dangers and nutrients arrive in estuaries from both the land and the ocean. So there are so many species living in estuaries.

Estuaries are great places for nature’s young. If many cities are built by estuaries, we can enjoy fishing, swimming and having fun on the beach and scientists and students have endless opportunities to study a variety of life in the habitat. What’s more, estuaries also contribute to the economy through tourism and fishing. So many cities have been built by estuaries.

T: In this unit, we’ve learnt some important phrases. Now I’ll give you a test to check whether you’ve mastered them or not. Look at the screen, please.

(Teacher uses multimedia to show the test on the screen and gives students a few minutes to finish them. Then checks their answers.)

1.The children’s age ______(在5岁至15岁之间).

2.______(她处理这个问题的方法) is very good.

3.A week later,______（也就是),Oct 1 is National Day.

4.He ______(充分利用了) multimedia in the class.

5.The little girl ______(对温度很敏感).

6.His actions ______(使他受到尊敬).

7.He ______(设法完成了工作) with very little help.

Suggested answers:

2. The way she deals with the problem

5. is very sensitive to temperature

T: Today, we’ve done some reading and writing. We’ve also reviewed some useful expressions in this unit. After class, go over all the important points we have learnt in this unit. That’s all for today. Class is over.

Step Ⅷ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Phrases: provide…for, have an opportunity to do, a variety of, contribute to

Teaching Aims:

1. Review the important usages of modal verbs.

2. Sum up the different situations of modal verbs.

Teaching Important Point:

How do we use modal verbs correctly.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How do we choose modal verbs correctly.

Teaching Methods:

1. Review method to master the important usages of modal verbs.

2. Inductive method and comparative method to master the important and difficult points.

Teaching Aids:

Teaching Procedures:

Greet the whole class as usual.

T: In this unit, we have done some practice about modal verbs. As we know, modal verbs have several points in common which make them quite different from other verbs. Now, please discuss the points in common among modal verbs in groups of four. After a while I will check your answers.

(Teacher gives students enough time to discuss, and then collects their answers and sums them up.)

Modal Verbs:

1. Modal verbs are used when we say that we expect things to happen or that things are possible, or necessary, or impossible, or improbable, or when we describe things that didn’t happen, or that we are not sure whether they happened.

2. Modal verbs have no -s on the third person singular. Questions and negatives are made without “do”.

3. Modal verbs have no infinitives.

4. Modal verbs have no past forms.“Could” and “would” are used with past meanings in some cases.

5. Modal verbs can be used with perfect infinitive to talk about things which didn’t happen, or which we’re not sure about.

Step Ⅲ Revision of the Important Usages of Modal Verbs

T: Good work. As we all know, modal verbs can be classified into eight groups according to their usages. Today we will review some important usages of modal verbs. Firstly, let’s review the modal verbs that can be used to express “possibility”.Please tell me which modal verbs can be used to express “possibility”.

Ss: Can/could/may/might all express “possibility”.

T: When they express “possibility”,they are not quite the same.“Can” is used to talk about theoretical possibility. If we want to talk about the actual chances of something happening, or being true, we use “could/may/might”.Besides,“can” is sometimes used to talk about present “possibility”,but only in questions and negative sentences. Is that clear?

T: Now, let’s do some exercises to master them better. Look at the screen and try to finish the sentences as soon as possible.

(Teacher uses multimedia to show the sentences on the screen.)

Fill in the blanks using can/could/may/might.

1. Would you like to answer the phone? It ______ be your sister.

2. The part of the country ______ be very warm in September.

3.______ it be Lily?

4. It ______(not) be true.

5. You ______ be right.

Suggested answers:

1. could/may/might 2.can 3.Can 4.can’t 5.may/might/could

T: Besides “possibility”,can/could/may/might are also used to express “permission”.Yes?

Ss: Yes. But we are not sure about how to use them.

T: It doesn’t matter. I will give you some explanation.“Can” is the commonest one of the four, and “could” is rather more hesitant than “can”.“May” and “might” are used in a more formal style. They often suggest respect.“Might” is more hesitant and is not very common. Besides, when we give permission, we usually use “can” and “may”,but not “could” and “might”.When we report permission,“may” is not usually used. Are you clear about it?

T: Then try to finish the following exercises, please.

(Teacher shows the exercises on the screen.)

1.-______I use your phone?

-Yes, of course. You ______.

2.______ you come into the meeting room without showing a passport?

3. Mary said that I ______ borrow her car.

Suggested answers:

3.might/could（“Might” and “could” can be used after a past verb.)

T: Next, which modal verbs do you think are necessary to review?

Ss: The modal verbs expressing “necessity”.They are very important.

T: Yes, I agree with you. We can use “must/have to/have got to/need” to express “necessity”.But about how to use them, I want you to review them by understanding the following sentences by yourselves. Look at the sentences on the screen.

(Teacher shows the sentences on the screen, and then asks some questions.)

1.I really must study hard.

2.You must be here by 3 o’clock.

3.You have (got) to go and see the manager.

4.You needn’t work on Sundays.

T: From the sentences, who can tell me the difference between “must” and “have to”?

S1:I want to have a try. When “must” is used, the necessity comes from the speaker. If the necessity comes from “outside”,“have (got) to” is more common.

T: Congratulations! Do you know how to use “need”?

S2:I think in negative sentences,“don’t need to”,“needn’t” or “don’t have to” is used to say that there is “no necessity”.

T: Please give me an example. OK?

S2:I know the reason why you were late. You needn’t try to explain.

T: Thank you. In addition, I want to tell you “have got to” is used instead of “have to” in informal English. Is that clear?

T: Now look at the blackboard.(Write the following on the blackboard.)

1. It must have rained last night, for the ground is wet.

2. You can’t have seen him yesterday, for he is still in Australia.

3. You could have told me he was coming.

4. She is very late. She may have missed the bus.

T: These sentences have something in common. Who can tell me what it is?

Ss: The modal verbs in these sentences are used together with perfect infinitives.

T: Very good. Then let’s review the modal verbs used together with perfect infinitives.

S3: When should we use modal verbs together with perfect infinitives?

T: When we talk about the past, we can use the structure, but it has a special meaning. It is used for speculating (thinking about what possibly happened) or guessing (thinking about how things could have been different).Have you got it?

T: Now let’s do some exercises to consolidate the usage of the structure.

1. I told Sally how to get there, but perhaps I ______for her.

2. You didn’t let me drive. If we ______ in turn, you ______ so tired.

D. had driven; wouldn’t have got

3.-I want to know why she is late.

-She ______ the early bus.

4.-I stayed at a hotel in New York.

-Oh, did you? You ______ with Barbara.

5. The light is still on. He ______ to turn it off when he ______ the room.

(Teacher shows the exercises on the screen and gives students enough time to finish them, and then checks their answers and gives them some necessary explanation.)

Suggested answers:

T: Now, it’s turn to review modal verbs expressing “advice”.Who’d like to tell me which modal verbs we can use to express “advice”?

S4:I think we usually use “should/ought to/had better” to give “advice”.

T: Yes. In most cases, both “should” and “ought to” can be used with more or less the same meaning. However, there is a very slight difference. When we use “should”,we give our own subjective opinion.“Ought to” had a rather more objective force, and is used when we are talking about laws, duties and regulations. Are you clear about that?

T: Who wants to give us an example using “should” and “ought to” expressing “advice”?

S5: People ought to vote even though they don’t agree with any of the candidates.

T: Well done. What about “should”?

S6: Let me try. You should see “Hero”-it’s a great film.

T: Thank you for your good performance. Do you know how to use “had better”?

Ss: Yes. When we use “had better”,we don’t usually mean that the action recommended would be better than another one. We simply mean that he/she ought to do it.

T :Please make up a sentence using “had better”.

S7: You’d better hurry up, if you want to get to the factory on time.

T: Up to now, we have reviewed modal verbs which express possibility, necessity, permission, advice and modal verbs used together with perfect infinitives. They are all very important. After class, try to do more exercises to master them better. That’s all for today. See you tomorrow.

Step Ⅴ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

1. It must have rained last night, for the ground is wet.

2. You can’t have seen her yesterday, for she is still in Australia.

3. You could have told me he was coming.

4. She is very late. She may have missed the bus.

高二英语设计教案 篇8

1．undertake vt. 承担(工作、责任等)；承办；着手做；从事

The lawyer undertook a new case． 那位律师承办了一件新的案子。

He undertook the difficult task willingly．他欣然承担那项困难的工作。

I will undertake the responsibility for you．我会为你负担起责任。

He undertook a new experiment．他着手一项新的实验。

Vt. 保证；担保；后接动词不定式或that从句。

He undertook to finish the work by Monday．他担保在星期飞以前完成工作。

I can't undertake that you will win in the election．我不能保证你在选举中会赢。

2．within prep．(表示时间、距离)“在……以内”

You will have to finish the work within an hour．你必须在一小时内完成工作。

He lives within two miles Of the school. 他家距离学校不到两英里。

The station is within walking distance away. 车站离此不远.

Stay within hearing distance of the house．不要走得太远．免得家人呼叫不到。

(表示范围、程度)“在… 范围之内”

Medicine should not be 1eft within reach of small children．

药品不可放在幼儿伸手可及的范围内．

They finally come within sight of the shore. 他们终于来到看得见海岸的地方．

It wasn’t within my power to help her. 帮助她井非我力所能从之事。

Our cars arre similar only 1n color． 我们的车子只是颜色类似，

My wife and I have similar tastes in music. 我妻子与我有相似的音乐爱好。

My opinions are similar to his. 我的看法与他的相似．

Wheal is similar to barley. 小麦与大麦很相似．

A squad car went by at full speed. 一辆巡逻车全速驶过．

He was not，n when I went by． 我过访的时候．他不在家。

Several years went by before they met again.他们过了好几年后才再度见面。

As time goes by．His hair is turning gray．随着时光飞逝。他的头发变白丁．

5. engage vt. 使订婚；常用过去分词作表语。

get engaged to sb． 与某人订婚(表动作)，

My daughter is engaged to a young teacher．我女儿和一位年轻的老师订婚了．

They got engaged last summer．他们于去年夏天订了婚．

engage (oneself)in sth 或be / get engaged in sth．“从事于某事；忙于做某事”

He wants to engage himself in foreign trade．他想从事对外贸易。

He was engaged in writing letters. 他在忙着写信。

I cannot go with you. I am engaged. 我不能跟你去．我现在很忙。

He engaged my sister as his secretary．他雇用我妹妹当秘书．

He has used up all his money他花光了所有的钱，

We used up all the bread al breakfast. 早饭我们吃光了所有的面包．

The so1dters were after the long battle.

士兵们在经过漫长的战斗后已经筋疲力尽了．

She dreamed of success in few years．她梦想几年后能成功。

I often dreamed of becoming a doctor. 我时常梦想成为一位医生。

I dreamed of her last night. 我昨夜梦见她了。

I wouldn't dream of cheating you. 我做梦也没想要欺骗你呀。

Little / Never did I dream of being elected. 我做梦也没想到会当选。

I never dreamed of there being such a good hotel in this town.

我真没想到这个城镇中还有这么好的宾馆。

He is seeking an answer to the problem．他正在寻找该问题的答案。

They sought shelter from the rain． 他们找寻避雨的地方。

He found订worthless to seek fame． 他发现追求名声是不值得的。

She sought for a solution to the problem．她寻找解决该问题的办法。

He is seeking after wealth and power and position.他追求财富、权势和地位。

vt．尝试；试图；后常接动词不定式作宾语。

He sought to deceive his parents but in vain．他试图欺骗双亲，但白费心机。

They sought to punish him for his crime but he escaped．

他们试图惩罚他的罪行，但他却逃跑了。

9．Turn out结果(是)；证明(是)；原来(是)；后常接“(to be)+ adj.／n．”，亦可接副词。

The night turned out cold and rainy．那个晚上结果是寒冷且下雨。

The rumor turned out(to be)true．那谣言后来证明是真的。

The plan turns out well． 那项计划结果很圆满。

He turned out(to be)a spy．他竟然是一名间谍。

可构成句型：It turns out that…“结果是……；后来证实 ．．．．．”。

It turns out that she has never been married．结果是她根本没结过婚。

It turned out that two travellers had been killed．后来证实有两位旅客丧生。

Don't be so curious! 别那么好奇!

She is too curious about her neighbors’business．她太好管邻居的闲事。

He was curious to know what would happen．他很想知道会发生什么事。

I am curious(as to)why she didn't come．我很想知道她为什么没来。

They looked at her curiously．他们好奇地看着她。

Curiously enough，he didn't Like music．说也奇怪，他并不喜欢音乐。

The murderer was punished by death． 那杀人犯被处以死刑。

Drunken driving should be punished severely by the law．

酗酒开车应受到法律严惩。

He narrowly escaped being punished．他差一点受到惩罚。

常用于punish sb．For doing sth．结构。

His father punished him for telling lies．他父亲因他说谎而处罚他。

The teacher punished him for cheating On the exam．

老师因为他考试作弊而处罚他。

12． Make a difference产生差别；有影响；起重要作用

I admit that makes a difference．我承认那与众不同。

Your support will certainly make a difference in our cause．

你的支持当然会对我们的事业起作用。

常用 it 作形式主语，后接wh-从句。

It makes a difference which you choose．你选择哪一个，事关重大．

It makes no difference which you choose． 不管他去或是不去，对我无关紧要。

match v.和……相配；和……相称；使较量”， 一般指两样东西互相匹配或两人的能力势均力敌．互为对手．

fit v.“使适合；使相配”，一般指衣服、鞋帽等合体、合身．强调大小、尺寸与某人的身材合适．

suit v．“适合于；相配”一般指气候、食物、花色．款式、设计等适合某人。

This hat matches your jacket perfectly. 这顶帽子跟你的夹克十分相配.

We must find carpets that’ll match the curtain.

我们必须寻找可和这些窗帘搭配的地毯.

I can't match her at chess. 我下棋比不上她.

The two pieces of furniture don't match. 这两件家具不搭配．

These shoes fit me very well. 这双鞋子我穿着大小正合适．

I don't think this jacket fits me; it's rather too small.

我想这件上衣不适合我，大小了。

This climate doesn't suit her. 这种气候不适合她。

Rich food doesn't suit my stomach. 油腻的食物不适合我的胃口。

The color of the dress suits her very well. 这衣物的颜色很适合她．

What if they should be thieves? 如果他们是贼的话怎么办？

What if she finds out that you have lost her book?

倘使她发现你弄丢了她的书，怎么办?

What if we fail/failed/should fail? 万一我们失败了，怎么办？

What if a storm should come up? 暴风雨要是来了怎么办？

What if I fail? 即使我失败了又能怎样？

what if 还可以用来表示“建议、邀请或要求”，从句中常用一般现在时或一般过去时．

(1)当“观察”讲时，observe相当于watch carefully，尤其用于实验或研究等场合。

(2)observe可意为“察觉到”(see and notice)，watch意为“盯着看”

(3)watch可意为“观看(比赛、电视、电影)等”，observe没有此意。

(4)watch还有“照料”之意，相当于take care of，也可意为“当心”，相

当于be careful with，pay attention to，observe没有此意。

He often observes the behaviour of birds.

The policeman observed the man open the window.

He observed that it had turned cloudy.

Do they observe Christmas Day in that country? 那个国家的人过圣诞节吗?

Anyone who comes here must observe the rules．来的人都必须遵守规定。

She has observed the stars all her life．她一生都在观察星星。

They were observed entering the bank at 8：32。他们被看到在8：32进了银行。

They watched the games while sitting under the trees．他们坐在树下看比赛。

She watched the train until汁disappeared from sight．

她一直看着火车消失在视线之外。

I'll watch the baby while you are away．你不在时由我照料婴儿。

You'd better watch Smith；I think he is a thief．

你最好当心史密斯，我想他是个贼。

Watch that the milk doesn't boil over．注意别让牛奶煮溢了。

固定句式：There’s no doubt that…

There was no doubt that he had been misunderstood.

There is little doubt that he will succeed.

There is some doubt whether he is guilty.

There's no doubt about／of his honesty．毫无疑问他是诚实的。

(提示)There's no doubt后接名词时，需用介词about或of. 如：

(链接)doubt作动词用时，肯定句中可用whether, if，that引起宾语从句，否定句中只能用that。如：

He doubted whether they would be able to help． 他拿不准他们是否能帮上忙。

I doubt if he's honest．我怀疑他是否诚实。

I doubt(that)he will come to the party． 我认为他未必会来参加聚会。

He never doubted that they would win the game．

他从来不怀疑他们将赢得那场比赛。

debate作动词用，意为“辩论，争论，参加辩论”，既可用作及物动词，也可用作不及物动词。如：

The question Of whether war can be abolished has often been debated．

战争能否废除是人们常常争论的一个问题。

They were debating about a foolish question．他们在争论一个愚蠢的问题。

(拓展)debate也可用作名词。如：

After much debate Harry was chosen captain of the football team．

经过许多辩论以后，哈利被选为足球队长。

After a long debate the bill was passed by the House Of Com-

mons．经过长时间的辩论以后，该议案在下议院通过。

(辨析)debate，argue，discuss与quarrel

(1)debate to argue about sth. ,usually in an effort to persuade other

(2)argue to present reasons for or against sth．，especially clearly

and in proper order 条理清楚地提出赞成或反对某事的理由

(3)discuss to talk about(sth．with sb．)from several points of view

高二英语设计教案 篇9

Ⅰ.Brief Statements Based on the Unit

More and more people like going on a trip to a faraway destination with the development of society.But before we start,we should know more about the destination we have chosen.This unit is arranged about the central topic-Destinations.In Warming up,teacher will ask students to talk about the routes and more places in the world,improving the students’ geography know ledge.In studying the reading material “Destinations”,the students will know more sights in the world and other things with the help of the teacher.By studying this unit,students will also know that finding out more about the destination is not only a good way to save money and avoid problems,it can also be a lot of fun.As to Grammar-Non-finite Verbs,a number of exercises are arranged.After doing them,students will master some knowledge of the Infinitive,the v.-ing and the Past Participle,and know how to use them.

1.Talk about travel and cities.

2.Practise making complaints.

3.Review the Non-finite Verbs(1):-ing,-ed,to do…

4.Write a descriptive essay/paragraph.

People are always telling us that“getting there is half the fun”.But is it true?Is it always true?Of course,we can all remember many enjoyable trips we have taken.But haven’t we all taken a trip that wasn’t fun at all?Can we ever forget the time when we just wanted to come home?

The fact is,some people who travel for pleasure get no pleasure from it at all.Others,who travel because they must travel,have a lot of fun doing it.What makes one trip more enjoyable than another?

The answer is planning.Any trip can be enjoyable if it is well planned.Every minute that you spend planning your trip may save you ten minutes of trouble during your trip.It may also add an hour of pleasure!

Before you take any trip,the first question to ask yourself is:How much can I spend?When you decide on a figure,write it down.Now you can decide where,when,and how to go.At home,you can find out what it costs to travel anywhere in the world.Just pick up the phone and call a travel agent(旅行社）.

In Season(旅游旺季)，Off Season(旅游淡季)

Many resorts(旅游胜地) nd cities around the world are popular during some months of the year and less popular during other months.Find out if the places you are visiting have an “in” season and“off”season.This may help you to decide when you want to go.

There are some very good reasons to travel during the off season.Usually everything is much cheaper.It is also less crowded,of course.If you don’t have a lot of money-or if you don’t like crowds of tourists(游客)-go in the off season.

Some places are not as exciting during the off season.The weather may be too cold or too hot.The beaches may be closed.Hotels and restaurants(餐馆) ay be shut.Be sure to find out before you go.

Passports(护照),Visas(签证) nd Health Certificates(健康证明)

It is not hard to get a passport,but you should ask for one a few months before you begin your journey.To get one you must have your birth certificate or another legal document(合法文件) o prove that you are a citizen(公民).

Sometimes you need a visa to visit a country.If a visa is necessary,you can ask for one at the country’s embassy(大使馆）.Sometimes getting a visa takes many months,so it is very important to plan early.The same is true for health certificates.For this information it is a good idea to call or write the embassies.You may also get a lot of other useful information from them.

Now that you have planned your trip,you are ready to take it.Should you expect any surprise?Of course you should.Let’s just hope they’re pleasant ones!

Science has changed the way we live and the way we think.New inventions and discoveries have made it possible for us to think about the world in new ways.The means of transportation-bikes,cars,airplanes-we use today are good examples.They are based on the idea that transportation means moving something from one place to another-on a bike,in a car or by plane.This takes time,of course,and we can only travel as fast as the laws of physics allow.It will be difficult to travel much faster than today’s airplanes and to travel very far,such as to the stars or to other planets.

Now,scientists believe that we might be able to send things from one place to another without actually moving them through space.This sounds strange,but a new way of transportation may become possible in the future.

Teleportation is a combination of sending information through telephones or the Internet and transportation.With normal transportation,for example by car or plane,a person or thing is moved from point A to point B.With teleportation,a person or thing is taken apart at point A and put together again at point B.If teleportation becomes possible,we may be able to travel faster and farther than we could ever imagine.

In the 1990s,scientists discovered that teleportation was possible.Experiments showed that teleportation could be done,but the thing being teleported was destroyed on the way.So far,scientists have only been able to teleport photons-particles(粒子) hat carry light-and laser beams(激光).What about teleportation of human beings?Teleporting a human being would be very difficult since there are so many parts in a human body.Even the smallest mistake could cause serious problems with the person’s mind or body.

There is still a long way from being able to use teleportation to move human beings,but what we used to think was impossible does now seem possible.What we know and what we imagine often work together:the more we know,the more we can imagine,and the more we imagine,the more we can learn.Science is the tool that we use to make our dreams become real and to build a new world with our ideas.

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn and master the following:

(1)New words:

(2)Everyday English:

I’m sorry to say…

I’m so sorry.

I hate to have to say this,but…

Could you do something about…?

Why didn’t you tell me the truth?

Why don’t you do something about it?

2.Train the students’ listening and speaking abilities.

3.Get the students to talk about travel and cities.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Finish the task of listening to train the students’ listening ability.

2.Finish the task of making complaints to train the students’ speaking ability.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to help the students finish the tasks of listening and speaking.

Teaching Methods:

1.Free talk,listening and speaking to train the students’ ability to use English.

2.Individual,pair or group work to make every student take an active part in class.

Teaching Aids:

Teaching Procedures:

T:Sit down,please.First I want to ask you a simple question:what would you like to do most during holidays?

Ss:Traveling/Reading books/Watching TV…

T:Yes.Most of you like traveling.Where have you been to?

Ss:Beijing/Shanghai/Qingdao/Harbin…

T:Is there anybody who has been to a foreign country for travel?

T:Do you hope to travel around the world?

T:Then you must know some famous cities in the world.Tell me their names,please.

Ss:Paris,Moscow,Sydney,San Francisco,Berlin…

T:Oh.So many!And they are all world-famous travel ,we’ll begin to learn Unit 15 Destinations.(Bb:Unit 15 Destinations)It’s a good chance to talk about travel and cities.Are you interested?

T:First let’s learn some new words for this period.

(Teacher shows the following words on the screen and asks one student to read them.Then ask the whole class to read together after him/her.)

△complaint /km′pleint/ n.投诉；申诉；抱怨，表示不满

uncomfortable /n′kmftbl/ adj.不服的，令人不自在的

T:OK.Now please open your books at Page 33 and look at the first part-Warming up.Imagine that you are offered a free ticket that lets you travel around the world and make five stops along the way.Can you follow me?

T:OK.Now,please work in pairs to tell each other where would you go and why.At the same time,draw your flight line in the box on the right and mark the cities you want to visit on the map.A few minutes later,I’ll ask some students to talk about your travel plan.Is everything clear?

(The students begin to work.Teacher goes among the class to see their work.At the end,teacher asks some students to talk about their plans.)

T:Now,let’s come to the second part-Listening.First,look at the following pictures taken of some foreign cities.Look at the first picture taken of Greece.What part of Greece do you think the picture shows?Any volunteer?

S1:I think it is the Egean Sea that the picture shows.

T:Then look at the second picture taken of Iraq.What can you see in it?

(Teacher and the students talk about the pictures briefly.After that,teacher says the following.)

T:OK.Now,let’s listen to the tape and do some exercises.The first time I play the tape,just listen to get the general idea.The second time,write down the answers.If there is difficulty in writing down the answers,I’ll play it again.At the end,we’ll check the answers together.Is that clear?

(Teacher begins to play the tape.)

T:We’ve talked a lot about travel and cities.However,while you are traveling,you may come across some problems unexpectedly,which could take place in the airline,the hotel or the restaurant.Can you guess what problems would occur?

Ss:Luggage is lost./The plane is late./The food is terrible…

T:What shall we do if we come across such problems?

Ss:Go to the manager and complain to him/her of the problems.

T:How do you think he/she will deal with the problems?

Ss:First,he/she may explain,apologize or argue.Then/he/she will do something about the problems.

T:Yes.If I were the manager,I would do like that as I see fit.Do you understand “see fit”?

T:“See fit” means “consider it correct,convenient or acceptable.”We can also use“think fit” to express the same meaning.For example,“Do as you think fit.”Do you understand?

T:OK.Now,please look at the last part-Speaking.Here are three situations about problems with services given to you.First,read the situations.Then choose one of them to act it out with your partner according to the role cards.Besides,don’t forget to study the useful expressions below the role cards and use them in your dialogue if possible.Is everything clear?

T:Well.Begin your work now.A few minutes later,I’ll ask some pairs to act out your dialogues before class.

A sample dialogue:

Student A:Manager Student B:Guest

A:How do you feel to live in our hotel?

B:On the whole,not so bad,but the room I am living in faces a noisy street,and I’m a light sleeper,so it is impossible for me to fall uld you please do something about it?

A:I’m so sorry.I’ll make an arrangement for you as soon as possible.Anything else?

B:I hate to have to say this,but the bed in my room makes me feel uncomfortable.

A:That’s too bad.I’ll settle this problem at once.

B:It’s very kind of you.Oh,by the way,would you please send someone to have a check on the supply of the hot water?There is no hot water at all.

T:Thank you for your wonderful performance.Now,let’s see what we’ve done in this class.First,we’ve talked about travel and cities.Second,we’ve practised listening.Third,we’ve talked about problems with services one may come across while travelling and practised making complaints.Of course,we’ve learned some useful expressions,such as “I’m sorry to say…”,“I hate to have to say this,but…”,“Could you do something about…?”…(Teacher writes them on the blackboard.)After class,practise them more and preview the next part-Reading.That’s all for today.See you.

Step Ⅵ The Design of the Writing on the lackboard

I’m sorry to say…

I hate to have to say this,but…

Could you do something about…?

I’m so sorry.

Why didn’t you tell me the truth?

Why don’t you do something about it?

高二英语设计教案 篇10

1. have sth. in common 2. a manned spaceship

3. in store 4. It is likely that…

7. get started 8. make… a success

9. a growing number of… 10. master’s degree

13. run a company 14. together with

15. have an positive effect on 16. as well as

19. be filled with 20. The success is no accident.

21. put forward 22. make many breakthroughs

23. highly successful 24. aim at

25. over the past twenty years 26. It seems to be love at first..

1. make a living 2. applied science

3. the latest idea 4. remind sb. of…

5. lay the foundation of… 6. be considered impossible

7. at the beginning of… 8. It is believed that…

9. set out to do 10. in their efforts to survive

11. turn out to be… 12. on board

13. from that day on 14. be dressed in

22. throw light upon 23. at the age of

24. at university 25. attract one’s attention

26. nothing else but… 27. It was… that… (强调句)

28. eight feet in height = eight feet high

31. light the flame of… 32. burn out

3. benefit from 4. range from… to…

5. all the way up 6. be made up of

9. become/be available to… 10. mix with

11. even through 12. be measured in…

13. take advantage of… 14. give off

15. be sensitive to 16. add… to…

17. make life possible 18. depend on

19. It sounds as if 20. do sth. bad to sb.

21. play a trick on sb . 22. call in

23. turn out (to be) better 24. have fun

25. a variety of… 26. contribute to

1. give a speech 2. be put in prison

5. be active in 6. as a result of

7. thousands of 8. make him famous

9. all over the world 10. mixed-race marriages

11. have no right to do 12. fight for / against

13. set an example to 14. Born in…, King went to…

15. achieve one’s goal 16. refuse to do

17. take the bus 18. separate…from…

19. It was… that… (强调句) 20. the following year

23. of all times 24. struggle for

27. go to university 28. ask for sth.

29. in modern times 30. have sth. in common

31. regardless of 32. come up with

3. every now and then 4. get the itch to do

5. spend… on… 6. feel the urge to do

7. stretch itself lazily along… 8. give sb. a glimpse of

9. next to 10. remind sb. that…

13. be located in 14. breath-taking scenery

15. a wide variety of… 16. go on a trip

17. a far-away destination 18 find out

19. be a lot of fun 20. prefer to do

23. make a list 24. seasoned travel

7. Despite… (名词) / Although… (句子)

12. in the 1960s 13. in honor of

16. be proud of 17. cultural diversity

18. be determined to do 19. be known for

20. once again 21. take the chance to…

22. disagree with sb. 23. look up

28. used to do 29. exist in huge numbers

30. grow to… 31. be forced to do

32. make agreements 33. be thought to…

36. have an effect on 37. end up with

1. overcome difficulties 2. as if

3. win an award 4. Class is over.

5. get/move around 6. everyday things

7. get dressed 8. live a rich life

9. make a contribution to… 10. reach one’s goal

11. play a valuable role 12. realize one’s dream

13. live a meaningful and productive life

14. visually impaired 15. live with

16. accept them as they are 17. get used to

18. while… (虽然) 19. be gifted in

20. every four years 21. mentally disabled

22. take part in 23. It seems as if…

24. Be the best you can be. 25. fail to do

26. participate in 27. gain self-confidence

1. environmentally friendly 2. be tired of

5. throughout the history 6. come up with

7. It seems that… 8. highly valued skill

11. get stuck 12. break away from

13. take another look at it 14. as with…

15. a series of… 16. make connections

17. be connected to… 18. be aware of…

19. keep trying 20. trail and error

21. Good ideas are no accident. 22. a great many

23. force sb. to do 24. all in the mind

25. part of our everyday life 26. We are said to do

29. A computer does keep information…

30. be different from 31. after all

32. allow sb. to do 33. not just…but

36. at such a high pace 37. make mistakes

40. keep track of…

1. take place 2. make a decision

3. give up 4. have mercy on sb.

5. promise to do 6. It’s useless doing

9. a most troublesome case = a very troublesome case

10. be accused of 11. a consequence of…

12. ask for 13. do right / wrong

16. tear up 17. swear to heave to do

18. do the deed 19. be in love with

22. pay back 23. sign the agreement

24. so wise a head = such a wise head

25. at the mercy of 26. go down on one’s knees

1. be curious about 2. date back to

3. be dressed (in) 4. It was / is… that… (强调句)

7. on average 8. It’s not yet known…

9. be linked to 10. have a hand in…

11. in terms of 12. It is thought / believed that…

13. armed conflict 14. It has been proved that…

15. in the eyes of… 16. since then

17. as well as 18. a large quantity of…

19. serve as 20. in ancient times

21. look very much like 22. remind sb. of …

23. because of 24. have links with

27. belong to 28. cover an area of…

高二英语设计教案 篇11

教学准备

教学目标

1.教学目标

(1)知识目标：学生能掌握下列重点单词和短语的意义和用法：greet, represent, approach, e_pression, defend, misunderstand, adult, cheek, major, likely, in general。能够表达一些Body language.

(2)能力目标：学生能掌握基本的阅读理解方法：速读，寻读，归纳中心和查找细节。

(3)情感目标：学生了解不同国家和文化的身势语，激发学生学习这种语言的兴趣。

教学重难点

教学重点和难点

(1)培养学生的阅读策略和技巧，让学生了解文章的细节知识和文章结构。

(2)让学生合适地使用不同的身势语。

(3)课文中现在分词作定语和状语的长难句。

教学过程

Step 1. Lead in

(1)The teacher shows a question on screen：How can we communicate with others when we can’t speak ?

Then ask a student to answer.

设计说明：引出本单元的话题。

(2) The teacher shows some pictures on screen of some body language and ask some students to guess and discuss the meaning they stand for.设计说明：引出本节课的题目。

Step 2. Fast reading

1. Go through the passage quickly and find out the main idea of each paragraph.

o Match the main idea of each para. with lines.

(Para.1) A. Other e_amples of different greeting body language.

(Para.2) B. Different people have different body language.

(Para.3) C. Summary of body language.

(Para.4) D. Meet the visitors at the airport.

(Para.5) E. E_amples of different greeting body language.

2. Try to write down the main idea of the te_t.

The te_t is mainly about different _____________ in different countries. In order to avoid difficulties in today’s world of cultural crossroads, we should ___________________________.

设计说明：通过这个题目的练习，让学生掌握速读，先对文章段落大意有一个了解。然后再去归纳中心思想。

Step 3. Careful reading

Read Para. 1 and decide if the following statements are true (T) or false (F).

(1) Yesterday, another student and I, representing our university's student association, went to the Capital International Airport to meet this year's international students. ( )

(2) After an hour of waiting for their flight to arrive, I saw several young people enter the waiting area looking around curiously.

( )

Read Para.2&3 and match the people with their ways of greeting

Tony Garcia (Columbia) A. shakes hands and kisses others twice

on each cheek

Ahmed Aziz B. Bows

(Jordan)

Akira Nagata (Japan) C. shakes hands

George Cook (Canada) D. approaches others closely and touches

their shoulder and kisses them on the cheek

Darlene Coulon(France) E. stand quite close to other men but will

usually not touch women.

Read Para. 4&5 and decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F).

(1) All cultures don’t greet each other the same way. ( )

(2) From the passage we can see western cultures are better than eastern cultures. ( )

(3) It’s necessary to study body language because it helps us to get better understanding among people from different cultures. ( )

(4) Only a small number of people greet by shaking hands. ( )

设计说明：通过这些题目的练习，让学生掌握文章的细节内容和阅读理解的细节题目的解题方法。

Language Points

1. approach vi. &vt.向……靠近;n.靠近;方法，步骤(后常跟介词to)

即时练习

(1) When I ____________(approach) the dog, it ran away at once.

(2) Can you come up with a good approach of solving this problem? (单句改错)

2. likely adj.可能的;有希望的

be likely to do很可能……;有希望……(主语既可以是人，也可以是物)

It is likely that...很可能……

即时练习

(1)She is the most _________ girl to win the prize.

(2) It’s likely that he will succeed.(句型转换)

=____________________________

3. Yesterday, another student and I, representing our university’s student association, went to the Capital International …...

representing是现在分词(非谓语)作定语，相当于定语从句：who represented ….，谓语是went。

即时练习

(1) Mr. Wang, who taught us English before, retired last week. (把划线部分变为非谓语)_____________

(2)The girl __________(study) in the classroom is my sister. (用非谓语填空)

4. I stood for a minute watching them and then went to greet them.

watching是现在分词(非谓语)作伴随状语，表示watch和stood同时发生，谓语动词是stood和went。

即时练习

(1) The boy stood there and cried.(把划线部分变为非谓语)

The boy stood there_________.

(2)The boy is sitting before the computer__________ (play) games. (用非谓语填空)

设计说明：通过这些题目的练习，让学生掌握课文中的重点单词，短语和长难句，促进对文章细节的理解。

Step 4. Consolidation

阅读下面材料，在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。

Yesterday, another student and I,(1)___________(represent) our university’s student association, went to meet this year’s international students. After half an hour of (2) _______(wait), I saw several young people enter the waiting area looking around(3) ___________ (curious). I went forward to meet (4) _______(their). After being introduced, they greeted each other in different ways, (5) __________(cause) some cultural mistakes.

As I get to know more international friends, I learn more about this

(6) __________ (culture) body language. People communicate not only with

(7) _________(speak) language, but also through physical distance, actions or posture. These actions are simply ways in (8) __________cultures have developed. (9) __________general, studying international customs can certainly help avoid(10)__________(difficult) in today’s world of cultural crossroads.

Correct the mistakes in the sentences.

1. I stood for a minute watched them and then went to greet them.

2. Julia stepped back appearing surprising.

3. Akira Nagata from Japan came in smiled.

4. Most people around the world now greet each other by shake hands.

5. These action are not good or bad.

Step 5. Free talk

After discussing with your deskmate, think out the body language you know and act it out.

Ask some pairs to perform in front of the class.

设计说明：学生通过阅读和讨论对文章有了深层的理解，同时对身势语这个话题更加熟悉。这个环节师生互动、生生互动，训练了学生的口语表达能力，促使他们把所学的知识和技能转化为运用英语的能力。

Step 6. Summary

What have we learned in this class?

We have learned:

o some body language in different countries

osome language points

ohow to communicate with different people properly using body language

设计说明：这一环节主要是对所学内容进行总结，使学生认识到学习“身势语”的必要性和重要性。

Step 7. Homework

Underline all the important words, e_pressions and sentences.

课后习题

阅读下面材料，在空白处填入适当的内容(1个单词)或括号内单词的正确形式。

Yesterday, another student and I,(1)___________(represent) our university’s student association, went to meet this year’s international students. After half an hour of (2) _______(wait), I saw several young people enter the waiting area looking around(3) ___________ (curious). I went forward to meet (4) _______(their). After being introduced, they greeted each other in different ways, (5) __________(cause) some cultural mistakes.

As I get to know more international friends, I learn more about this

(6) __________ (culture) body language. People communicate not only with

(7) _________(speak) language, but also through physical distance, actions or posture. These actions are simply ways in (8) __________cultures have developed. (9) __________general, studying international customs can certainly help avoid(10)__________(difficult) in today’s world of cultural crossroads.

Correct the mistakes in the sentences.

1. I stood for a minute watched them and then went to greet them.

2. Julia stepped back appearing surprising.

3. Akira Nagata from Japan came in smiled.

4. Most people around the world now greet each other by shake hands.

5. These action are not good or bad.

高二英语设计教案 篇12

Talk about Shakespeare and his plays

Learn to recount detail in conversation

Review Direct and Indirect Speech

Correct me if I’m wrong, but…

One of the most important facts is…

As far as I know…

You shouldn’t forget that…

You could, for example, …

After all,…

What shouldn’t be forgotten is…

The way I would go about it…

But in this particular case…

merchant, crown, deny, mercy, enemy, reasonable, weakness, judgement, gentleman, greeting, envy, troublesome, requirement, declare, merciful, bless, legal, deed, surgeon, court, justice, therefore, kindness, punish, punishment, order, sword, complex

Venice, Hamlet, Romeo, Juliet, Troilus, Cressida, uneasy, Bassanio, Antonio, Portia, Shylock, duke, masterpiece, revenge, ducat, fate, scale, Bellario, tragedy

pay back, have mercy on, go about, as far as I know, tear up, at the mercy of, go down on one’s knees

merchant, mercy, accuse, declare, fortune, bargain, worthy, consequence

Review Direct and Indirect Speech

You might as well go stand upon the beach and argue with the sea.

If you offered me six times what you have just offered, I would still take my pound of flesh.

Shylock, how can you hope for mercy for yourself when you show none? P67

To do a great right, do a little wrong and in that way we can save Antonio. P68

If Shylock cuts deep enough, I’ll pay him back with all my heart. 68

1. Check the students’ writing.

2. check if the students have found some information about Shakespeare.

Get the students to work together to talk about the quotations, the pictures and the plays of Shakespeare.

No 1 comes from Hamlet and its meaning is being terribly upset and undecided.

No2 comes from King Henry Ⅳ and its meaning is that a person who has great responsibility, such as a king, is constantly worried and therefore doesn’t sleep soundly.

No 3 comes from Hamlet. It means that it’s best not to lend money to other people and not to borrow from other people.

No 4 comes from Romeo and Juliet and its meaning is why my lover Romeo is from a family that has a long feud (世仇，不和) with mine.

No 5 comes from Troilus &Cressida and its meaning is empty words, not real thoughts or ideas from the heart.

Encourage students to discuss the two situations using the useful expressions

Get the students to talk about the picture, and then do the two tasks according to the instruction.

After some practice, the teacher can ask some pairs to act their play out in front of the whole calss.

Learn the new words by heart.

Ask some pairs to act out their play

Listen to the tape and do Part 1 and 2

Students are asked to read fast the questions and then listen to the tape twice to answer the questions.

Step 4 Homework.

Listen to the materials again after class.

Preview the reading.

Task: Ask students to retell the main characters of the Merchant of Venice and their relationship according to the listening part.

Talk about the picture to arouse the students’ interest in reading the play.

Get students to analyze the characters, finding out some details and explaining the deeper meaning of some puns and symbols.

Deal with some language points if possible:

1. You might as well go stand upon the beach and argue with the sea. P67

2. if you offered me six times what you have just offered

3. Shylock, how can you hope for mercy for yourself when you show me none?

Step 4 Post-reading:

Listen to the tape and then finish the post-reading Ex on p44-45.

Preparations: Language Study on p 69 and Vocabulary on P139-140.

Check the homework.

Step 2 Word Study and vocabulary

Check the answers orally.

Revise the Direct and Indirect Speech.

Review the rules of the Direct and Indirect Speech; Read the passage on P71-72.

The 5th Period Extensive reading

Step 2 Listening and Fast reading

P142 Extensive reading.

Go through the questions on P142, and listen to the tape and answer the questions

Review what we’ve learned in this period and prepare for the writing task.

How to write a short play:

Read about Romeo and Juliet on P142-143.

Write a short passage about Romeo & Juliet.

Read some sample essays and give comments on them.

Check Your writings with the other groups.

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇)

愿作园丁勤浇灌，甘为蜡炬尽燃烧，优质的教案可以延续很多年不过时。教案可以帮助教师充分实现教学意图，你是否也在积累名师的教案模版？今天小编为大家推荐一篇很不错的文章主题是“小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇)”，希望本文能给您提供借鉴！

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇1

活动目标：

1、让幼儿了解自己的小手，乐意用语言表达。

2、会用它们大胆地进行艺术表现与创造，喜欢装饰。

3、引导孩子们在活动结束后把自己的绘画材料分类摆放，养成良好习惯。

4、鼓励儿童发现生活中的美，培养幼儿对美术的热爱之情。

活动准备：

手图片一张;字卡片(手背、手心、大拇指、食指、中指、无名指、小指);橘子

活动环节：

一、引出主题

1、师：快来，快来我们一起来做游戏啦!

2、(放音乐)做游戏。教师边讲边做动作

3、师：刚才我们一起做游戏了，是用我们身体的哪个部位呀?

二、游戏：认识小手

1、师：看看我们手上都什么?

2、师：有几个手指啊，来数一数?

3、师：你认识他们吗?

指导：(1)我们一起来拉拉勾，拉勾的手指叫什么?

(2) 看看我们的黑板在哪里啊?你们用的是那根手指啦，它叫什么?用食指指给我看看，风琴在哪里、电灯在哪里、、、、、、

(3)宝宝们真聪明，看看我用了哪根手指?

(4)我们把小手拿出来看看谁最高啊?它旁边各有几根手指啊?所以它叫中指，在中间的。

(5)还有一跟手指真可怜没人踩它，它没有名字，所以叫无名指。

4、出示手图片，图字相结合

小结：边说边出示字

三、游戏“变魔术”

1、师：我们的小手会变魔术：小手小手变魔术，变出小鸡叽叽叽。

2、幼儿变魔术

3、教师用儿歌总结出来。

四、能干的小手

1、师：我们的小手除了变魔术外，还可以干吗?

2、师：我们的小手本领真大。平时都是爸爸妈妈剥橘子给宝宝们吃的，今天就请宝宝门来剥给爸爸妈妈吃好吗?

3、师：看看小橘子是什么颜色的，什么形状的。小橘子，圆又圆

剥开橘皮露橘瓤，爸爸妈妈吃了甜到心里面。

活动反思：

小班小朋友对新鲜的事物充满着好奇，喜欢尝试，根据这个特点，故此次活动选择用颜料印画小手，通过此活动让幼儿去体验另一种作画方式的乐趣。从活动效果来看，我觉得此次活动基本达到了预期的目标，我为每个幼儿都提供了自由的发展空间，每个幼儿都可以动手来操作，通过家长以及老师的帮助下，小朋友的兴趣很浓厚，都印得很开心。使幼儿在情感，知识，技能等方面得以发展。在第一环节游戏导入中，小朋友们和教师的互动特别好，大家都很喜欢做游戏，跟老师学的很认真很开心。

但也有不足的地方，我没有把握好幼儿的特征，经验水平不足，以至于在老师示范分别印出太阳、花的时候，小朋友们都没能说出老师印的是太阳、花，而老师却把小朋友们说的都一棒打死，其实在这个环节，小朋友们说像什么老师是可以顺着他们的意思的，不一定非得是老师规定好的，非得让他们说出一定是这样或一定是那样，这些都是我未考虑到的。我觉得上好一节课不容易，能将好的活动举一反三那就更不容易了，这些都要求老师有足够的教学机智，还要掌握好方式方法，我觉得自己要学习的东西还很多，在以后的教学工作中我会虚心向领导和有经验的教师多请教多学习，多思考多总结，考虑的要全面，在设计每个环节时问问自己它的价值在哪里，能够给孩子带来什么，活动中老师该如何引导孩子，选择什么样的教学方式等等，这样才能使自己的专业获得更快发展。

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇2

设计意图

小金鱼在我们的自然角一出现，就吸引了孩子们的注意了，大家开始七嘴八舌的讨论小金鱼的外姓特征和生活习性，针对孩子们的表现，我想孩子们既然那么有兴趣，何不以次为契机，让孩子对小金鱼的外形有更深的认识呢？因此生成了今天的教学活动。

活动目标

1、了解小金鱼的外形特征。

2、鼓励幼儿用两种颜色大胆涂色，发展幼儿的协调能力。

活动重、难点

重点：了解小金鱼的外形特征。

难点：用深浅不同的同种颜色为小金鱼穿衣服。 活动准备 范画若干、油画棒，幼儿用轮廓图

活动过程

一、导入活动：

出示实物小金鱼引导幼儿说说这是什么？

师：今天我们教室里来了一个小客人，你们看他是谁啊？（小金鱼）

师：你们在什么地方看到过小金鱼，它是什么样子的？有哪些颜色？（引导幼儿说出金鱼的外形特征）

二、出示教师范画，幼儿观察：

师：下面请你们看老师画的是什么？

师：对了老师把刚才小朋友说的小金鱼画了下来，好看吗？（好看）

师：老师刚才为小金鱼穿上了漂亮的衣服，你们看小金鱼的衣服有什么特点？（有而自由回答）

师小结：小金鱼的衣服是有深浅不同的同种颜色画上去的。

师：还有很多小金鱼没穿衣服呢？下面请小朋友为他们穿上漂亮的衣服。

三：教师示范讲解：

师：小朋友在为他们穿衣服前，先看老师是怎么给他们穿的。

师：颜色要往一个方向涂，要涂的满、实，但是不能涂到黑线外面去。

四、提出作画要求：

1、师：我们在为小金鱼穿衣服前首先要想好穿什么颜色的衣服？要怎么涂色？先涂哪里？再涂哪里？

2、鼓励幼儿大胆作涂色，看谁涂的又快又好？

3、画画的时候，要安静作画，不影响别人，注意坐姿。

五、幼儿作画，教师给予及时指导，对画的又快又好的幼儿及时给予肯定，指导能力差的幼儿正确涂色。

六、观赏评析作品：

1、为幼儿的作品写上名字，看看谁画的好。

2、请个别幼儿谈谈自己喜欢谁的小金鱼，为什么？

3、教师小结：我们小朋友为小金鱼穿上了漂亮的衣服，小金鱼可开心了，请我们一起去做游戏。

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇3

目标：

1．感知物体的颜色，能按物体的颜色进行分类。

2．愿意参加小组操作活动，初步学会按每个小组活动的要求进行操作。

准备：

1．红、黄、蓝三种颜色的胸牌。(一种颜色各占幼儿总数的三分之一)

2．红、黄、蓝三种颜色的木珠一筐；穿珠绳若干，每根绳头拴一个木珠(如红色木珠)作为分类的标记。

3．红、黄、蓝三种颜色的雪花片一筐，瓶娃娃(瓶娃娃头上各系一种颜色的彩带做头发，作为分类的标记)。

4．纸盒做的红、黄、蓝三种颜色的小房子各一座，红、黄、蓝三色的小纸片若干。

过程：

1．游戏：颜色碰碰乐。

按顺序出示三种颜色的胸牌，让幼儿说出颜色。

每个幼儿选一个胸牌挂在脖子上，当老师说颜色碰碰乐时，同种颜色的小朋友相互间碰一碰。

游戏34次，同种颜色的小朋友还可以做做鬼脸等。

2．分组做分类练习。

玩穿珠游戏。

如：绳头拴红色木珠，这根绳上就穿红色的木珠。

玩喂娃娃游戏。

如：黄头发的瓶娃娃给他喂黄色的雪花片。

玩片片回家游戏。

如：蓝色的纸片回蓝家。

建议：

1．分组活动时，幼儿可自由选择。

2．将本活动的材料放在益智区，供幼儿操作。

评价：

1．能辨认红、黄、蓝三种颜色。

2．能根据颜色进行分类。

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇4

【活动设计背景】

老师展示出创作的各种作品激发孩子想创作的兴趣,表达设计的意图。

【活动目标】

尝试用排序的方法装扮设计袜子,运用不同的材料进行表现;体验创作设计的快乐。

【教学重点、难点

1、 创造想象不同的花纹

2、能表达自己设计的理由。

【活动准备】

袜纸样人手一份、双面胶、记号笔、银笔、剪好的小花花和蝴蝶结、水彩笔、油画棒。

【活动过程】

一、导入主题

1、小朋友们都穿着漂亮的衣服,这些衣服是哪里的?谁做的呢?为什么都不一样呢?是谁设计的?你们想当小小设计师吗?那么今天我们也来当一名设计师好不好?你想当吗?你会设计吗?你准备怎么设计?

二、观察比较,引导发现

1、材料:展示老师的作品看看是谁把这些袜子设计得打扮的这么漂亮啊?

2、花纹:黑笔宝宝画了什么花纹啊?

银笔宝宝帮袜子装上了闪闪发亮的银光灯

小朋友还能想出什么花纹?

3、边观察,边演示

1)撕去袜统上的双面胶,粘上剪好的小花花或蝴蝶结

2)用黑笔宝宝画上袜统下的花纹、周围的花纹、中心花纹

3)用银笔宝宝点缀,画上闪闪发亮的银光灯

4)撕去袜子后面的双面胶

5)找到另一边的也设计一下

三、创作表现

1、小朋友想不想做一双漂亮的袜子?

2、教师重点指导

1)粘小花花时,要一小块一小块粘

2)画花纹时,要画得大些,鼓励幼儿创造想象不同的花纹

3)先画花纹再装扮

4)颜色和材料的运用要用排序的方法

3、你们只设计袜的一面,另外一面是空白的好看吗?

四、展示交流

幼儿带着自己设计的袜去找好朋友展示幼儿的作品,体验设计制作袜子的快乐,讲出设计的理由。

【教学反思】

整节课孩子们的课堂气氛很活跃,掌握的基本的要点。充分发挥了动手的操作能力,有部分幼儿充分发挥了创新能力完全不按照老师的方法自己画出了很美观的图形。大多数孩子都能自己动手操作,完成作品。如果让我重新上这节课我会在选择材料上多样化一些,不仅仅是袜子,应该还有剪好的衣服、裤子、鞋子、帽子、围巾等等。这样更能提高孩子们的兴趣,也能使孩子们有选择的余地。

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇5

一、设计意图：

小班幼儿年龄小，动手能力差，特别在撕纸方面表现尤其突出，他们对撕的力度及外形不会把握，因此我设计了撕贴送伞这一活动，初步发展幼儿的撕贴技能，培养良好的操作习惯。

二、活动目标：

1、学会沿针孔轮廓撕蘑菇伞，掌握撕的技能。

2、激发幼儿相互合作、帮助的情感。

3、发展幼儿的操作的能力。

三、活动准备：

1、大背景图一副（图下方有兔妈妈和小兔劳动的场面，图上方画有乌云雨点。）

2、两张半幅图（一张是阴天，一张是晴天，可覆盖整幅大背景图的上方。）

3、带有蘑菇伞针孔轮廓的大纸一张，带有蘑菇伞针孔轮廓的幼儿操作纸若干、浆糊、抹布每组一份。

四、活动过程：

（一）听音乐做律动进教室，激发幼儿学习兴趣。

（二）出示大背景图（晴天图覆盖乌云和雨点），

1、提问：（1）图上有谁？他们正在干什么？（2）天气怎么样？

2、在晴天图上再覆盖阴天图。

提问：（1）呀！一会儿天气快要怎么啦？

（2）小兔们淋了雨会怎么样？

（3）那我们可以用什么办法能使小兔们淋不到雨呢？

3、教师小结幼儿的办法，那我们一起来做些伞送给小兔们，好不好？

（三）教师讲解示范撕伞的方法。

（1）教师着重示范讲解撕伞。

（2）伞撕好了，那怎样送给小兔呢（启发幼儿说出伞应送到小兔的头上方）？

（四）幼儿操作，教师巡回指导。

（1）教师提出作业要求（提醒幼儿操作时注意卫生）。

（2）幼儿操作，教师注意个别指导。

(3)教师表扬鼓励相互谦让、帮助的幼儿。

（五）活动评价。

(1)小朋友你们看，哪一把伞最好看？为什么？（幼儿评价，教师给予肯定，并提出建议和希望。）

(2)刚才呀！小兔们得到了我们小朋友的帮助，他们非常高兴，还说要谢谢小朋友呢！那平时别人有了困难我们应怎么做呢？对，不管是谁得到了别人的帮助都会很高兴的，你们愿意帮助别人吗？

五、活动延伸：

(1)在美术区活动中为幼儿提供不同形状的轮廓纸，继续提高幼儿撕和粘贴的技能。

(2)在日常活动中积极鼓励幼儿相互合作、帮助。

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇6

活动目标：

1.尝试和泥，让幼儿关注泥巴的变化。

2.会初步用团和捏的方法玩泥。

3.培养孩子对泥工活动的兴趣。

4.鼓励幼儿与同伴合作绘画，体验合作绘画的乐趣。

5.会用它们大胆地进行艺术表现与创造，喜欢装饰。

活动准备：

泥制品若干(如元宵、小兔、毛毛虫、小花等)

活动过程：

1.请幼儿欣赏泥制品，引起幼儿的兴趣，并让幼儿讨论它们是用什么做成的。

2.引导幼儿尝试和泥，感受泥土和泥巴的特征。

(1)请幼儿穿上围兜，每人装上一小盆干泥土，用手摸一摸，压一压，感知泥土的特征是：松松的，软软的。

(2)引导幼儿说一说泥巴是怎样和成的，并初步尝试一下。

(3)请幼儿观察并用手触摸一下，

感受泥巴的特征是：湿湿的，粘粘的。

3.以玩游戏的方式引导孩子参与：“今天我们来玩个超级变变变的游戏，看一看，瞧一瞧，我变了什么?(变成个元宵)又变成了什么?(变成个毛毛虫)，然后给幼儿示范用团和捏的方法玩泥，先把泥巴团成球形，再捏成各式各样的东西，教师要注意讲清要领和注意事项。

4.每人一块泥巴，请幼儿用团和捏的方法玩泥，玩的时候要注意和同伴相互学习，并鼓励幼儿创造性地玩泥。

5.幼儿相互欣赏并交流自己的作品，指出好在哪里，不好在哪里。

活动延伸：

1.把做好的泥制品放好晒干，并给晒干的泥制品上色，投放到展区供幼儿欣赏。

2.在手工区投放湿泥，颜料，模具等，鼓励幼儿继续创造性地玩泥。我的创新：

小结及反思：

本次活动主要是通过欣赏泥工作品，让小班幼儿初步了解泥工艺术，并练习泥工的基本技能：团和捏，发展幼儿的动手能力，想象能力及创造力。在活动开始时，先让幼儿掌握了怎样去和泥，由于小班孩子初次接触泥工活动，我又以游戏的方式引导孩子们积极参与，以引起他们的强烈兴趣，并在团团捏捏的过程中体验到玩泥的快乐。虽然孩子们的作品还较粗糙，但很可爱，有的还较有创意，虽然他们玩的手指黑黑的，但都很开心，而我陪着孩子们玩泥巴，也像回到了儿时快乐的感觉。

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇7

美丽的线条(小班)1

活动目标:

1. 认识直线.曲折线.波浪线.螺旋线.

2. 能大胆画出各种线条.

活动准备:

画好各种线条做以备示范,黑笔和画纸.

活动过程:

一.预热阶段:

教师出示线条图片.

提问:小朋友们你们认识这些漂亮的线条吗?他们叫什么名字?

二.图形刺激

1.教师示范直线的画法.

师:再画直线时要注意笔不能晃才会画的漂亮.

2.教师示范曲折线的画法

师:曲折线像鲨鱼的牙齿一上一下,尖尖的牙齿!

3.教师示范波浪线的画法

师:波浪线也是一上一下,不过没有尖尖的牙齿.

4教师示范螺旋线的画法

师:螺旋线像蜗牛的家一圈一圈的.

三.创造表现

1.幼儿创作,教师鼓励幼儿大胆绘画.

2.在教师的指导下画出直线.曲折线.波浪线.螺旋线.

3.在操作过程中对于出现的问题即时纠正.

四.作品赏析

展示幼儿作品,说说自己画了哪些线条.

将幼儿作品布置在我是小画家一栏

五彩的色块(小班)2

活动目标:

1.练习用直线交叉画块面,巩固练习直线.

2.学习用各种颜色图块面.感受色彩的美.

3.体验艺术活动的愉悦.

活动准备

1. 五彩的色块示范画.

2. 沙皮纸和油画棒.

活动过程:

一. 预热阶段:

1. 请幼儿欣赏五彩的色块示范画.

师:图上有什么线条?这幅图上的颜色你认识哪一种?

2. 教师向幼儿介绍几种常见的颜色.

二. 图形刺激:

1. 教师示范:

老师边讲直线画法边动手画,画直线时一定要画到纸的边上.

直线与直线间不能靠的太进,不然就不好涂颜色.

2. 教师示范图色块:

可以选择自己喜欢的颜色来涂.(强调用力)

涂颜色时要注意从上往下或从左往右.

3. 请幼儿记住不能把颜色涂到其它框里.

三. 创造表现:

1. 幼儿大胆的在沙皮纸上用直线画块面.

2. 找自己喜欢的颜色涂块面.把每个块面涂的满满的.

3. 教师在幼儿绘画时出现的错误即时纠正.

四. 作品赏析:

1. 展示幼儿作品请幼儿欣赏,说说自己用了哪些漂亮的颜色.

2. 将幼儿作品布置在我是小画家一栏.

调皮的老鼠(小班)3

活动目标:

1. 继续巩固直线.曲折线.波浪线.螺旋线,

2. 学习弹簧线的画法.

3. 体验艺术活动的愉悦.

预热阶段:

故事导入:在森林里,有一个花仙子,有一天,它听到了一段美妙的音乐,跳起了舞蹈,许多小花跟着她一起跳起来,都变成了最美丽的花.

二. 图形刺激:

1. 幼儿听故事与老师一起跳舞.

2. 请幼儿欣赏小花是怎么跳舞的(欣赏示范画)

请幼儿说说这些花在干什么,学学它的姿态.

3. 教师演示好看的花儿.

三. 创造表现:

1. 全体幼儿在故事中做画.

2. 教师鼓励幼儿大胆地运用各种线条创造性地画小花.

3. 及时表扬有创意的幼儿,让幼儿体验创造成功的快乐.

四. 作品赏析:

请幼儿欣赏各种美丽的花,布置幼儿的作品展.

太阳升起来了(小班)5

活动目标:

1. 引导幼儿用线条大胆地表现升起的太阳.

2. 能用自己喜欢的色彩给太阳涂上漂亮的颜色.

3. 体验活动的愉悦,享受成功的快乐.

活动准备:

1. 太阳升起来了示范画.

2. 油画棒,黑笔,画纸.

活动过程:

一. 预热阶段:

1.请幼儿欣赏儿歌太阳当空照,太阳当空照花儿对我笑,小鸟说早早…

2.请幼儿说说太阳长什么模样呀?

二.图形刺激:

1.今天我请小朋友看看刚升起的太阳,它露出半边脸.请幼儿欣赏作品.

2.教师演示:

1)在纸上先画一条直线,直线要画到两头.

2)在直线上画一跳弧线,弧线在爬山坡要慢慢的爬.

3)给太阳画上眼睛.鼻子.嘴巴.

4)用各种线条给太阳画上漂亮的头发.

5)用各种颜色给太阳公公穿上好看的衣服

三.创造表现:

1.幼儿大胆地表现刚升起的太阳公公.

2.幼儿给太阳公公穿上花衣服.

3.幼儿绘画时即时给予表扬.对于错误即时纠正.

四.作品赏析:

幼儿欣赏自己的作品,共同交流做画的快乐,展示幼儿作品.

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇8

教学目标：

在拓印的基础上进行水粉添画表现刺猬的形象。

积极参与活动，体验水粉作画的乐趣。

教学准备：

1.切开的山芋、灰色水粉颜料盆

2.黑色、黄、红、橘色水粉、棉签

3.有背景的长卷画纸、范画、示范用背景纸（8开）、背景音乐

教学重难点：

重点：山芋拓印刺猬的外形及添加果子。

难点：学会用提画的方法添画刺。

教学手段与方法：

图片辅助教学、观察法、演示讲解法、操作法

教学过程：

一、导入引出主题：

出示红薯：这是什么？吃过吗？红薯不仅可以吃，还可以用来画画呢！

二、拓印示范：

教师出示切开的红薯进行拓印示范

三、幼儿拓印：

幼儿拓印，教师巡回指导，鼓励幼儿大胆操作。（提醒：各部位用力按一按；不同的方向印）

四、示范画刺猬：

1.想象：长圆形的脚印像什么？

2.示范：看看老师将它变成什么？

3.了解添画步骤：小刺猬是怎样变出来的？先画什么，再画什么？（重点学习刺的画法。）

4.欣赏范画：（强调动态、不同方向刺的画法）

五、幼儿创作：

1.提供黑色水粉画五官、刺、脚

2.提供黄色、红色、橘色添画果子

六、展示作品、欣赏评价：

师：你喜欢哪只小刺猬？为什么？哪只小刺猬身上的刺尖尖的？这只小刺猬怎么摘果子的？

师：冬天就要到了，小刺猬背了这么多的果子准备过冬了，他真高兴，谢谢你们！

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇9

活动目标：

1、让幼儿感受艺术美，体验与家长共同游戏的乐趣。

2、引导幼儿掌握用手指点画的技能。

3、学习用手指点画在桃树枝上，并能表现大小不同的桃花。

活动准备：

1.示范画一张。

2.粉红色的颜料每组一盒，抹布(纸巾)每人一块、A4纸每人一张、水彩笔每人一盒、蝴蝶贴纸20个、双面胶一卷3.相关课件、轻音乐

活动过程：

(一)老师带领家长与幼儿欣赏春天的景色。(大家围成一个半圆而坐)师：你们认识我吗?(认识)我是什么老师?(黎老师)今天黎老师要带我们小班的小朋友和爸爸妈妈一起来玩一玩，你们开心吗?(开心)黎老师啊今天给大家带来了许多美丽的春天景色，你们看看!(放PPT春天的景色)

(二)手工活动一、通过欣赏图片，在猜一猜中激发幼儿绘画的兴趣。

1.师：黎老师还带来了一幅好看的图片，(出示花苞图)这会是谁的花苞呢?我们来看看。(出示满是花苞的桃树图)

二、在看一看中感受桃花的形态美。

1.师：宝宝们发现了吗?原来这是桃树上的花苞啊!(出示桃花图)

2.观察桃花的形状、颜色等特征。

师：桃花是什么颜色?(粉红色)我们看看它像什么?(引导幼儿观察桃花的形状)

三、教师示范印画，教授印画技巧。

1.(配教拿着一棵没有开花的小桃树图)小朋友们看，前面有一棵桃树哦!我们来听听桃树说什么了?(配教哭泣)桃树怎么了?(它在哭)桃树为什么哭啊?我们一起来问问它吧。(配教哭腔：别人都穿上漂亮的衣服了，我出来晚了，还没穿上漂亮的衣服呢。)

2.教师拿来调好的颜料，说：那老师来帮小桃树穿衣服，让他高兴好不好?你们觉得春天的桃树会穿上怎样的衣服?接下来老师来给桃树穿漂亮衣服了，我们来看看吧!(教师边说边用手指压印桃花)

3.介绍作画材料，并讲解印画技巧师：你看到黎老师是用什么画的?(伸出食指)我把食指上沾了什么?(颜料)我沾的时候是伸出食指轻轻沾到颜料，按的时候是用力按下去，这样印出来的花瓣才清楚、干净。

4、引导幼儿观察教师的印画。

师：看看老师印的这些桃花是怎么样的?(有的大有的小，有的地方多有的地方少，有的两片花瓣是好朋友，有的三片花瓣是好朋友。)

5、教师利用儿歌的形式启发幼儿印画的技巧。

师：我们再看看黎老师是怎么画桃花的?(边画边念儿歌加深幼儿的印象：颜料盘里蘸一蘸，慢慢拿起按下去，有大有小，有多有少，我的桃花朵朵红)。

6、画好后，教师把准备好的小蝴蝶贴到桃花上，让蝴蝶飞来采花蜜。

师：小朋友们，待会爸爸妈妈也会给我们带来很多小桃树，可是他们都不高兴，它们想请小朋友们帮它们开满一树的桃花，引来小蝴蝶采花粉呢。

四、家长和幼儿操作。

1、教师提出点画要求师：小朋友在点画的时候，手指上的颜色不要往身上抹，保持画面干净。请家长们画树干，幼儿画桃花。好，现在就让我们开始吧!(配教搬桌子，大家分组进行操作)

2、教师巡回指导，提醒幼儿保持画面整洁，对动手能力弱的幼儿及家长给予一定的帮助，能力强的给予赞赏。

3、看着孩子的桃花画得差不多的时候，可以根据需要，启发幼儿与家长大胆想象，添画小草等与春天相关的内容。

五、体验成功乐趣。

1.作品展示，相互欣赏评价。

教师把幼儿完成的作品贴在黑板上，让大家一起欣赏。

2.教师讲评。你最喜欢哪一件，为什么?(表扬画得好，有良好作画习惯的幼儿)

3.活动结束。

师：现在是桃花开放的季节，今天我们和爸爸妈妈一起画桃花，那你们想不想去看看真的桃花呢?(想)这个周末我们就让爸爸妈妈带我们去看吧!

活动反思：

春天是一个五彩斑斓的世界，小草发芽了、花开了、柳条儿绿了，大地焕然一新------在这个春暖花开的季节，我们开展了本次美工活动《桃花开了》，希望孩子能在制作桃花的过程中进一步感受到春天的美，同时也能在捻揉纸团的过程中发展幼儿的小肌肉动作。

为了让孩子们对桃花有一个初步的认知并且对制作桃花感兴趣，我们预设了活动前带孩子去校园观赏桃花的环节，但是可惜的是由于活动前连日的下雨，树上的桃花都谢了。所以我只能改成了活动前让孩子们观赏美丽桃花的图片，尽管没有看真正的桃花那么真实，但是孩子还是很兴奋，而且图片更利于幼儿近距离的观察桃花。

欣赏完桃花，初步认识了桃花之后，就要开始激发幼儿制作桃花的兴趣了。原教案上是用真的树枝，幼儿将制作好的“桃花树”插入到沙箱里，打扮“花园”。我尝试了一下，发现用胶水(因为没有糨糊)把皱纹纸的小团粘贴上去不好粘贴，所以本次活动我们改成了在印有桃树的操作纸上进行粘贴活动。

首先，我出示了自己事先制作好的范例，大大激发了幼儿制作的兴趣。孩子们在赞美桃花的同时也表示自己也想制作美丽的桃花。

接着便是本次活动的重点，了解掌握制作桃花的过程。由于有些孩子早就已经发现我办公桌上的制作材料了，当我问到“你们知道这么漂亮的桃花是怎么制作出来的吗?”时，田雨涵他们就说“是用皱纹纸做出来的”。当被问到“长长的皱纹纸怎样才能变成圆圆的桃花”时，孩子们也立刻想到了用手搓一搓，捏一捏。

在简单教授了制作方法后，就到孩子们自己动手操作探索的环节了。而作为一个美工操作活动，事先的准备工作一定要充分。因为本次活动主要是练习捻团、粘贴的技能，所以需要教师为幼儿准备好剪好的长条形粉色皱纹纸、胶水、抹布，印有桃树枝的操作纸。虽然有了充足的物质准备，但是在活动过程中还是有个别孩子出现了争抢材料的现象。如有些孩子喜欢把皱纹纸都捏在自己手里，他们总觉得谁先抢到就是谁的，缺少分享意识。通过教育，孩子们很快就有了改善。还有一些孩子喜欢把一组上一盆的胶水放在自己身边，这就导致了别的孩子没有胶水用了。考虑到一组上一小盆胶水确实不便于所有孩子取用，所以我又每组增添了一盆胶水，并且规定邻近的几个孩子一个共用一盆胶水。

所有问题解决后，在老师的巡回指导下，孩子们也逐一完成了自己的作品。于是我立刻便把孩子们的作品零时布置在了作品墙上，然后让孩子们互相欣赏同伴们的“桃花树”，让他们在欣赏中找出自己最喜欢的作品。在这一过程中孩子们都很积极踊跃的参与到了“谁的桃花树最漂亮”的讨论中来。孩子们互相欣赏的同时其实也是一个取长补短的过程。

活动结束后，回想整个实施过程，我运用了提供问题情境——激发幼儿的制作动机——引导幼儿探索的教学策略，强调充分发挥幼儿的主体性，通过幼儿自身的探索，在制作过程中提高幼儿自己学习的能力。同时在让幼儿自己探索的过程中，我也不忘适时引导，如当他们通过自己的探索还找不到解决问题的途径时我及时地介入，给予幼儿技术上和精神上的支持，帮助幼儿树立对美工活动的信心。

本次活动目标完成较好，幼儿参与的兴趣较高，看着自己的作品布置到墙上，幼儿都很开心，变得更自信了，更加喜欢美工活动了。

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇10

活动目标：

1.能用沿线剪的方法剪出荷包蛋圆圆的蛋黄，巩固剪圆的技能。

2.在"撒"葱花的过程中体验剪纸的乐趣。

3.作画时细心地蘸色，保持桌面和画面的干净，体验不同形式美术活动的乐趣。

4.感受色彩对比。

活动准备：

PPT、剪刀、胶水，黄色彩纸(中间有圆形)、绿色长条形彩纸、画好蛋白的白纸。

活动过程：

1、香香的荷包蛋

(1)放荷包蛋PPT，问：这是什么?你吃过荷包蛋吗?味道怎么样?在家谁会做荷包蛋?今天我们用剪刀来做荷包蛋，你们想来试试吗?

(2)引导幼儿观察荷包蛋的颜色、形状。

师：荷包蛋里面是什么颜色的?什么形状?荷包蛋的外面是什么颜色?形状象什么?

2、葱花荷包蛋

(1)引导幼儿看葱花荷包蛋图片，问：你觉得用哪些颜色的纸来做荷包蛋比较合适?(白色、黄色、绿色)

--这三种颜色的纸分别做荷包蛋的什么?(白色做蛋白，黄色做蛋黄，绿色做葱花)

--师：荷包蛋要下油锅喽!

做蛋黄：手握黄色彩纸的沿着圆形的线剪，剪好后贴到蛋白中间。

撒葱花：荷包蛋在油里面快煎好了，如果撒一点葱花在上面那会更香，我们在荷包蛋上再抹点油(浆糊)，尽量在荷包蛋上把"油"抹均匀，然后用绿色的纸剪出一点一点的葱花撒在荷包蛋上，香香的荷包蛋煎好喽!

--幼儿动手做荷包蛋，教师巡视指导能力差的孩子。

3、美味荷包蛋 --将幼儿做好的荷包蛋"盛"到大盘子里。

请幼儿选一个自己最想"吃"的荷包蛋。

活动反思：

本次活动幼儿兴趣较浓，可是撕纸对于小班孩子来说似乎是很有难度，所以降低了幼儿撕纸的难度，直接在白纸上画一个小圆，让孩子们沿着这个黑线把圆形撕下来，这样蛋白的制作就方便很多啦。因为是第一次尝试这样的撕纸活动，所以相对给幼儿的难度比较小。这样的方法似乎每个幼儿都能很好的接受，制作的荷包蛋都是非常美味的。

但在活动中也存在不足，开始部分还应设置一些情景，毕竟是小班的孩子，这样能更好地激起孩子的兴趣。

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇11

活动前言：妈妈带我逛街，偶尔看到了有买金鱼的，有黑色的，红色的，还有白色的，游来游去真漂亮，缠着妈妈给我买了两条，还买了好多的鱼食，现在我的小金鱼似乎都长大了呢！通过此活动可以更多的培养孩子们的艺术细胞，增强宝宝们的耐性！

活动目标

1、观看幼儿示范，倾听教师讲解，学习在指定范围内画彩色的点，表现美丽的大鱼。

2、学会认真、耐心地进行美术活动。

3、欣赏表现鱼的各种形式，感知了解点画特有的风格，提高幼儿的感受力。

活动准备：

1、幼儿用书人手一册，棉签若干，颜料盘每组2-3盘。

2、水墨画、油画棒、水彩等形式表现的各种形态的鱼。

3、在白纸上画一条鱼的线条。

活动过程：

一、听谜面引出主题。

教师：有头没有颈，身上亮晶晶，有翅不能飞，没脚倒能行。这是一种生活在水里的动物，请你猜一猜这是什么动物？

二、教师出示范例——鱼。

教师：图上有什么？你知道它是用什么笔、什么颜料画的吗？

向幼儿简单介绍绘画的方式，感受不同的艺术风格。

三、欣赏幼儿用书，了解棉签画的特点。

教师：看图说说，图上有什么？鱼身上有什么？鱼鳞是怎样的？你知道鱼身上的鱼鳞是用什么表现的？

出示黑板上白色线条鱼以及棉签和颜料，请个别幼儿分别上来示范在大鱼身上画点点，表现彩色的鱼鳞。

四、介绍操作要求。

选择自己喜欢的、色彩鲜艳的颜色。

在指定的范围内自主地进行点画活动。

点画要均匀，画面要用棉签点满空白的地方，不要留很大的空间。

五、幼儿操作活动，教师巡回指导。对个别能力较弱的孩子给予个别指导。

六、展示幼儿作品，说说：你最喜欢的大鱼。

七、带领幼儿开展音乐游戏：网小鱼。

让幼儿在欢快的音乐中，在池塘里游来游去

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇12

【活动设计】

本次活动以绕羊毛的形式，引导幼儿由内到外一圈一圈画螺旋线，并且创设了小羊穿漂亮衣服的情景，符合小班孩子现阶段的年龄特点和兴趣需要。同时还借助生动形象的儿歌帮助幼儿理解、掌握画螺旋线的方法。

【活动目标】

1、学习用手沾色从里往外绕螺旋线。

2、能均匀地画满“羊毛”。

3、探索、发现生活中小羊的多样性及特征。

4、使小朋友们感到快乐、好玩，在不知不觉中应经学习了知识。

重点：借助儿歌，能由内到外一圈一圈画螺旋线。

难点：尝试画一个一个圆圆的、绕得整齐的`羊毛。

【活动准备】

调好的颜料，涂好颜料的小羊范画，没涂颜料的小羊若干张。

【活动过程】

一、出示范画，激起幼儿兴趣。

1、今天老师给小朋友带来了一位小客人，你们猜它是谁？

2、它是用什么画的呀？

二、教师讲解并示范用手指作画。

1、我们的食指可神奇了，它可以帮羊宝宝画出漂亮的衣服。

2、引导幼儿从里往外画螺旋线。

3、这条线像个小蜗牛，请小朋友把每个小蜗牛画的大小要均匀，不要画的太大，应该把整个羊的身体装饰满满的。

三、幼儿操作，教师巡回指导。

四、作品欣赏。

互相欣赏同伴的作品，说说最喜欢谁的，为什么？

【活动反思】

这是我们小班段美术特色活动，由于是四个班我们第一个上，而且是自己设计教案，由于在上课之前我没有完全理解陈老师的意思，所以画在螺旋线时和其他班级存在一定的误差。在集体备课时大家都认真讨论了这节课，首先是在内容设计上，我们没有考虑到幼儿的实际水平，幼儿沾颜料绕羊毛，对小班孩子来说有一定的难度。观摩过其它班级的课后，我不断地进行反思，觉得这节课我有许多不足，如颜料调的太浓，幼儿在操作时，绕螺旋线只能绕到半圈；示范讲解时不够清晰，导致幼儿操作存在误差；卫生常规强调太多。

小百科：羊是羊亚科的统称，哺乳纲、偶蹄目、牛科、羊亚科，是人类的家畜之一。有毛的四腿反刍动物，是羊毛的主要来源。毛色主要是白色。我国主要饲养山羊和绵羊。

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇13

活动要求：

1.体验用汽车轮胎沾颜料画的几种不同方式。

2.享受与同伴共同创作及其乐趣。

材料及环境创设：

1.各种不同的玩具车子及贴绒交通标志若干。

2.各种调好的颜料。

3.幼儿作画纸及示范画纸。

活动指导：

（一）故事情景式引题，师生共同探讨用汽车轮胎作画的不同方式。

教师与幼儿入活动室后自由的围在桌子旁，师：嘀嘀，汽车去旅行喽！我们得先加油！

（出示颜料，教师沾颜料）好，出发！前面是一条宽宽的公路，我们的汽车怎么开呢？哦，是直线的开！嘀嘀！嘘，听！有哗啦啦的声音！哦，是一座弯弯的桥。，我们要开过弯弯的桥，谁来开？啊，像彩虹一样的弧线开！开过桥后，我们要上山了，上路是弯弯曲曲的，怎么开啊？呵呵，小朋友的开车技术真好！像曲线一样，这样弯来弯去的开！不好，这段路有坑坑，开起来会怎样？

（二）幼儿练习作画。

小朋友，那边已经有许多汽车要去城里旅行咯！大家准备出发，在汽车没油时及时给它加上。记住，一辆汽车只加一种颜色的汽油。

（三）幼儿欣赏画，并进行贴画。

汽车也累了，我们让它们休息休息。过来瞧瞧，汽车在旅行中用汽油竟做了一幅美丽的画，像什么？（幼儿自由想象回答）

汽车开出有很多很多的路，这一幅图还像交通图。教师边出示贴绒教具交通标志边介绍。

让我们把这些标志都贴到交通图里，使我们的交通图更完美吧！

（四）师生配合来个汽车接龙游戏，活动结束。

城市交通图真漂亮！我们也来变汽车，来个汽车接龙开开开！我当龙头，你们在我的后面。好，出发！前面是马路，我们直线的往前开！嘀嘀！

马路前面有桥，我们弧线的开！桥的前面有山路，我们弯弯曲曲曲线的开！天哪，有坑坑，我们开起来都一颠一簸了！哦，总算又是一条宽广的马路，我们可以直线的开咯！教师直接带幼儿出活动室，活动结束。

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇14

活动目标：1.初步了解有关西瓜的简单知识。

2.尝试学习手指点画。

3.培养幼儿动手操作的能力，并能根据所观察到得现象大胆地在同伴之间交流。

4.会用它们大胆地进行艺术表现与创造，喜欢装饰。

5.让幼儿体验自主、独立、创造的能力。

教学准备：

西瓜、相关操作纸若干，黑色水粉，抹布等

教学重点：

引导幼儿讲出有关西瓜的事。学习画短的竖线

教学流程：

观察、讲讲—品尝—操作—谈话

教学过程：

1.出示西瓜，说说西瓜像什么? 看老师切西瓜，说说切开的西瓜像什么? 绿色的是什么? 哪些是可以吃的?

2.品尝西瓜。一边品尝一边找找，瓜瓤里还有什么?是什么颜色的?

3.点瓜籽。教师出示一张画有西瓜片的纸，教师提问：这是什么?它上面少了什么? 教师示范，提出要求：卷起袖子，用食指按以下黑颜色的海绵在西瓜图片上点，然后再按一下海绵再点。但是不要在一处重叠点，点完后在抹布上把手指抹干净。

幼儿操作，提醒幼儿适当点画。

4.小朋友帮西瓜点好籽了，说说你的西瓜想给谁吃?

教学反思：

每一次新的尝试都能够从孩子们身上反馈到或多或少的信息。虽然这是孩子们从未接触的艺术形式，但整个过程都是在盲目的探索中的，每段盲目的探索都会有一个劳动成果的出现，而每个劳动成果的出现最终都会促进教师各方面不同水平的提升。

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇15

活动目标：

1. 知道粗线与细线，感受线条的流动与多变。

2. 会大胆画出不同的线条，感受线与点的对比效果。

3. 感受黑、白、红色彩搭配的简约美，体验自由作画的乐趣。

活动准备：

白、红方形、长方形的画纸若干 粗细黑色记号笔 水彩笔 每人一段毛线 优美的.音乐活动过程：

（一）引入活动师：瞧，这是什么？这是一根细细的线，这是一根粗粗的线。线宝宝会跳好看的线条舞。

播放音乐，老师舞动手中的线，让幼儿感受线条的变化。

师：看，线宝宝会跳圆圈舞、波浪舞、横线舞、竖线舞……【创意体现：线条跳舞的形式新颖特别，能抓住幼儿注意力，用一种特别的方式让幼儿观察线。】

师：线宝宝跳的舞好看吗？它会跳什么舞？（幼儿回答）教师带领幼儿回忆各种线条。

（二）幼儿第一次作画1.示范新授师：线宝宝跳舞这么好看，小朋友想不想把线宝宝跳的舞留在画纸上？我们一起来看看有什么好办法可以把线宝宝的舞留在画纸上。

教师播放操作视频。【创意体现：将演示过程制作成视频避免了线条无法在黑板上演示的弊端。】

指导语：把线宝宝在调色盘里蘸上颜料，让线宝宝吸足颜料，接着就让线宝宝在画纸上随意地跳舞，跳长长的直线舞、弯弯的弧线舞、大大的圆圈舞……请细细的线宝宝跳一跳，再请粗粗的线宝宝跳一跳，跳完红色的，再个黑色的，小朋友你看清楚了吗？赶紧邀请你的线宝宝去跳舞吧。

2.幼儿作画，教师巡回指导提醒幼儿：要邀请不同粗细的线宝宝，每种舞都要跳一跳，多跳几次。保持画面的整洁。

第一次讲评：教师有针对性地挑选几张作品。

指导语：谁来找一找粗粗的线宝宝？细细的线宝宝在哪呢？线宝宝跳的圆圈舞在哪？波浪舞在哪？……

（三）第二次作画过渡语:点宝宝是线宝宝的好朋友，它来和线宝宝一起跳舞了。

1.讲解示范师：用瓶盖蘸上颜料，到纸上压一压，点宝宝就留在纸上了。换不同的盖子，纸上就有大大小小不同的点宝宝了。小朋友还可以用自己的手指来画点宝宝。

2.幼儿作画，教师指导提醒幼儿：用大小不同的盖子印点，保持画面整洁。印完以后用抹布擦擦手。

【创意体现：①老师提供粗细不同的线条；②大小不同的盖子；③分两次讲解、作画；④整体画面有创意。】

（四）结束部分人手一根丝带，跟着音乐挥舞丝带，充分感受线条的流动和多变。

师：线宝宝和点宝宝跳的舞好看吗？我们也来跳一跳好看的线条舞吧。【创意体现：请幼儿一起舞动丝带，以游戏的形式再次充分感受线条的流动与多变。】

小班美术教案设计(收藏16篇) 篇16

设计意图：

《纲要》中提出了幼儿在表达表现中需要达成的目标有：留意和感受生活中的声、形、色及音乐、舞蹈、美术作品中的美。在绘画等活动中，自然地表达自己的情感。自主地选择各种材料、器具和多种形式进行表达和创造。

活动通过故事《小老鼠学画画》引入，并了海绵球印章、棉签作为工具，让幼儿将圆和线条进行组合，创造性地表达和表现生活中带有圆圆的事物，促进幼儿思维正确性和创造性的发展。

活动目标：

1、尝试用圆形与线条组合的方法表现各种物体，并乐于展开想像。

2、在活动过程中体验制作扇子的乐趣。

重点：用圆形与线条组合的方法表现物体。

难点：能变出各种不同的物体。

活动准备：

1、 材料准备：

（1）红、绿、紫、咖啡色颜料各三份，大中小三种海绵印章各三份、12根棉签，分别放在三个桌子上。

（2）各种扇子底板人手一份。

2、 经验准备：有画过圆形物体的经验。

活动过程：

一、活动导入：小老鼠学画画——引起幼儿兴趣

（一）导入语：夏天到了，天气越来越热了小动物们都想去买把扇子，扇一扇凉快些。于是小老鼠准备要开一家扇子店，为了让扇子变得漂亮，小老鼠正忙着画画呢。

（二）关键提问：瞧~小老鼠有两样很棒的工具，你们认识吗？小老鼠的海绵球扑通一声跳进红色的颜料里，你们看印出了什么？扇子上只有一个红红圆不好看，小老鼠用棉签帮忙，看红红圆变成了什么？

：红红圆变成了苹果，糖果。

二、讨论演示：如何帮小老鼠画扇子——启发孩子想出圆能变出的东西

（一）关键提问：你们能帮小老鼠想想吗？红红圆还能变成什么？

师：你们真聪明，今天小老鼠把海棉球带来啦，

师：海绵球可想跳了，小老鼠说我这里有红色的颜料，绿色的颜料和紫色的颜料，你们想让海绵球跳进什么颜色里啊？

（二）：海绵球跳进*色的颜料里，用用力，扇子上印出一个**圆。

第一次示范：

师： **圆能变成什么？怎么变呢？要请什么工具来帮忙？请你来试一试。

哇~赶快告诉小老鼠，扇子上变出来圆圆的什么啦？

第二次示范：

师：小老鼠说我的海绵球还想跳，你们想让海绵球跳到哪里去啊？

师：谁愿意来试一试？

师：海绵球跳进*色的'颜料里，用用力印出**圆

关键提问：**圆能变成什么呢？——毛毛虫

（追问：毛毛虫需要几个圆？请你来）

（哎呀，毛毛虫的身体断了，我来帮他加几节身体）

师：圆都印好了，这是毛毛虫的什么？身体有了，还缺什么？请你来。

师：赶快告诉小老鼠，扇子上又变出来什么啦？

：一个圆可以变成一样东西，几个圆也能变成一样东西。棉签帮帮忙，圆变成了太阳。棉签帮帮忙，圆变成了毛毛虫。

关键提问：棉签帮帮忙，圆还能变成什么啊？

师：你们真聪明说了那么多东西。小老鼠一个人忙不过来，他的店里有很多没做完的扇子，想请你们用海绵球和棉签帮帮忙把扇子变漂亮好吗？

分批请孩子上来拿扇子。

师：想一想你要让海绵球跳进什么颜料里，就去那张桌子旁边。

三、幼儿作画：帮小老鼠画扇子——展开想象，动手操作

师：想一想，把你们刚才说到的东西都变出来哦~

指：小老鼠看见***的扇子上有圆圆的**咯

扇子上的圆变得越多越不一样就越漂亮哟。

指导策略：鼓励幼儿表现出不同的东西。

四、引导讲评：小老鼠开扇子店——分享交流作品

师：扇子画好了，扇一扇凉快吗，问问小老鼠你喜欢吗？小老鼠喜欢就把它查到货架上去吧。

师：小老鼠说，谢谢你们，你们辛苦啦，今天画到这里吧，请找张椅子来我店里休息休息。

师：小老鼠要问了扇子上有那么多东西，你们都把圆变成了什么啊？

：小老鼠说你们在扇子上变出了那么多圆圆的东西，真好看，我真喜欢，小动物一定也很喜欢，这下我的扇子店可以开张啦。

活动评析：

人们习惯把幼儿绘画看作一种技能练习，忽视对幼儿思维的训练，这种理解是不全面的。对于小班幼儿而言，他们的创造性思维开始萌芽，绘画能够更自由、直接地表达出他们语言不能表达的，对外部世界的感情和自己内心的感情。一年来孩子们画过许多圆圆的物体，如，太阳、棒棒糖、苹果、毛毛虫等等，对圆形的事物有一定的认识和了解，于是我创设了小老鼠开扇子店的富有童趣的情境，让幼儿尝试用圆形与线条组合的方法表现各种物体，从而使其创造性思维在绘画活动中得以发展。

活动中孩子们置身于情境中，乐于展开想象。小班的幼儿好模仿，大部分孩子首先画出了老师示范的图像，然后将他们常常见过的画过的事物再现，用圆形与线条相组合的方式，表现出来，个别能力强的孩子还能创造性地表现出一些自己熟悉的事物，眼镜、葡萄等物品。对于创造力相对较弱的幼儿教师若多出示些圆形事物的图片，可能会更有利于这些孩子思考表现作品。

点评

小班是幼儿创造性培养的启蒙阶段，教师通过一些简单的方法让孩子尝试大胆创造、表现，有利于想象力的发展。教师海绵、棉签等绘画工具，一方面可以激发幼儿参与的兴趣，另一方面又可以锻炼小班幼儿手部肌肉的协调性、灵活性。